Teles Informationstechnologien CDMA32VOIPUS Cellular/PCS CDMA Gateway User Manual TELES iGATE V16 2

Teles AG Informationstechnologien Cellular/PCS CDMA Gateway TELES iGATE V16 2

Users Manual

CELLX

Reference Manual

Software version 16.2

TELES AG | HEADQUARTERS

Ernst-Reuter-Platz 8

10587 Berlin

GERMANY

Phone +49 30 399 28-066

Fax +49 30 399 28-051

E-mail sales@teles.com

http www.teles.com

TELES®, IntraSTAR®, Intra*®, iGATE®, and iSWITCH® are registered trademarks of TELES AG

Informationstechnologien. All other trademarks used are the property of their respective owners.

The supplied hardware/software systems are protected by copyright and can be used solely by their lawful

owners.

All text and figures in this publication have been compiled with great attention to detail. Nonetheless,

inaccuracies and typographical errors cannot be entirely avoided. TELES AG Informationstechnologien

provides this document 'as is' without warranty of any kind, expressed or implied. TELES AG

Informationstechnologien reserves the right to make changes in product design or specifications without

notice.

Reference Manual

CELLX

CELLX 16.2

Revised:18 November 2011Software version: 16.2

Page 1CELLX 16.2

1 About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

1.1 Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

1.2 Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

1.3 Safety symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

2 Safety and security precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

2.1 Safety measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

2.2 FCC / Industry Canada Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

2.3 EMC protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

2.4 System security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

2.5 Servicing the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

2.5.1 Replacing components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

2.5.2 Protecting the operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

2.6 CDR files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

2.7 Network security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

3 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

3.1 What’s new in version 16.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

3.2 New Access Gateway product names starting version 16.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

3.3 How CELLX works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

3.4 Supported implementation scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

4.1 Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

4.2 Package contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

4.3 Hardware description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

4.4 Installation requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

4.4.1 Ethernet wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

4.4.2 PRI wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

4.4.2.1 TELES to TBR12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

4.4.3 Antenna connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

4.4.4 SIM card assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

4.5 Preparing for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

4.6 Hardware connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

4.7 Startup with Quickstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

4.7.1 Installing Quickstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

4.7.2 Configuration with Quickstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

4.8 Startup via GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

4.9 LED functionality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

4.9.1 Ethernet port LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

4.9.2 Base Board PRI port LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

4.9.3 Mobile Board SIM card LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

4.10 Remote access and access security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

4.10.1 GATE Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

4.10.2 Graphical user interface (GUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

4.10.3 FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

4.10.4 Setting a password for remote access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Page 2CELLX 16.2

5 Configuration files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

5.1 Configuration file ip.cfg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

5.1.1 System section configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

5.1.2 Ethernet interface configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

5.1.3 GUI settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

5.1.4 Bridge configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

5.1.5 NAT configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

5.1.6 PPPoE configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

5.1.7 Firewall settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

5.1.8 Bandwidth control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

5.1.9 DHCP server settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

5.1.10 DNSmasq settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

5.1.11 PPP configuration for mobile and ISDN dial-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

5.1.12 VLAN configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

5.1.13 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

5.1.13.1 Default configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

5.1.13.2 Active ethernet bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

5.1.13.3 Integrated DSL-router scenario for VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

5.1.13.4 VLAN scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

5.2 Configuration file pabx.cfg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

5.2.1 System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

5.2.1.1 Global Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

5.2.1.2 Log files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

5.2.1.3 Night configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

5.2.1.4 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

5.2.1.5 Subscribers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

5.2.1.6 Global settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

5.2.2 SMTP-client configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

5.2.3 Number portability settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

5.2.4 SNMP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

5.2.5 Time-controlled configuration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

5.2.6 .CASR2 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

5.3 Configuration file route.cfg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

5.3.1 Entries in the [System] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

5.3.1.1 Restrict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

5.3.1.2 MapAll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

5.3.1.3 Redirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

5.3.1.4 Setting the time-controlled sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

5.3.2 VoIP profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

5.3.3 Gatekeeper profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

5.3.4 Registrar profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

5.3.5 Radius profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

6 Routing examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

6.1 CELLX integration in an H.323 carrier network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

6.2 CELLX as a second-generation LCR with VoIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

7 Mobile configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

7.1 Network-specific mobile routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

7.1.1 Routing decisions for calls to the mobile network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Page 3CELLX 16.2

7.1.2 Using the LAIN as the mobile port address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

7.1.3 Fixed LAIN for a mobile port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

7.2 Incoming voice calls from mobile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

7.3 Blocking ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

7.4 Mobile user PBX callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

7.5 Optional mobile quality parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

7.6 Deactivating mobile rerouting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

7.7 Setting autodial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

7.8 Disconnecting calls after ring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

7.9 Checking ports/mobile channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

7.10 Defining special characters for voice calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

8 Signaling and routing features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

8.1 Least cost routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

8.1.1 Carrier selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

8.1.1.1 Routing entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

8.1.2 Alternative routing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100

8.1.3 Charge models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

8.2 Online traffic monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

8.2.1 ASR calculation and resetting statistic values and counters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

8.2.1.1 Saving and sending statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

8.2.1.2 Saving statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

8.2.1.3 Resetting statistic counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

8.2.2 Generating and retrieving CDRs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105

8.2.2.1 Call log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

8.2.2.2 Missed calls list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

8.2.2.3 Sending CDRs via e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

8.3 Ported number screening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

8.4 Digit collection (enblock/overlap receiving) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

8.5 Rejecting data calls and specified numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

8.5.1 Blacklist routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

8.5.2 Whitelist routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

8.5.3 Rejecting calls with ISDN bearer capability data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

8.5.4 Specific routing of data calls via VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

8.6 CLIP and CLIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

8.6.1 Routing CLIP and CLIR calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

8.6.2 Routing calls without CLIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

8.6.2.1 Setting CLIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

8.6.2.2 Setting CLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

8.7 Conversion of call numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

8.8 Overwriting OAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

8.9 Setting number type in OAD/DAD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

8.10 Setting the screening indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

8.11 Setting a default OAD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

8.12 Setting or removing sending complete byte in setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

8.12.1 Exclusion from SIM minutes counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

8.13 Miscellaneous routing methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

8.13.1 Routing calls without a destination number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

8.13.2 Routing calls based on extension prefix or the length of the DAD . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

8.14 Changing cause values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

8.15 Call forking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Page 4CELLX 16.2

9 Additional VoIP parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

9.1 Signaling parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

9.2 Registrar parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

9.3 Routing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

9.4 Quality parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

9.5 Compression parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

9.6 Fax/modem parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

9.7 DTMF parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

10 System maintenance and software update . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

10.1 Configuration errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

10.2 Status and error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

10.3 Software update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

10.4 SNMP agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

10.5 DNS forwarder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

10.6 ipupdate - DynDNS client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

10.7 Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

10.7.1 ISDN trace output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

10.7.2 GSM/CDMA/UMTS trace output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

10.7.3 VoIP trace output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162

10.7.3.1 Interface IP network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

10.7.3.2 Internal protocol interface (to ISDN, mobile) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

10.7.3.3 H.245 messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

10.7.3.4 RAS (registration, admission, status) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

10.7.3.5 ENUM output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

10.7.3.6 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

10.7.4 Remote output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

10.7.5 SMTP trace output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186

10.7.6 Number portability trace output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

10.7.7 DTMF tone trace output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

11 Feature packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

11.1 Activating the license . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193

11.2 Two stage dialing/callback server functionality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194

11.2.1 Announcements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

11.2.2 Two stage dialing with DTMF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

11.2.3 Callback with DTMF and OAD as callback number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

11.2.4 Callback with DTMF and preconfigured callback number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

11.2.5 Callback to OAD with predefined destination number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199

11.2.6 Callback with PIN and preconfigured callback number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199

11.3 Least cost routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

11.3.1 Carrier selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201

11.3.1.1 Routing entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201

11.3.2 Alternative routing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201

11.3.3 Charge models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202

11.3.4 Generating charges with the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

11.4 Online traffic monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

Page 5CELLX 16.2

11.4.1 Generating and retrieving CDRs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

11.4.1.1 Call log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

11.4.1.2 Missed calls list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211

11.4.1.3 Sending CDRs via e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213

11.5 Ported number screening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213

11.6 Call recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215

11.6.1 Call recording procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

11.6.2 Call recording configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

12 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

12.1 No connection to the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221

12.1.1 System does not start correctly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221

12.1.2 Web interface is not accessible. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

12.1.3 IP address settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

12.1.4 Firewall issues and NAT / PAT settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

12.1.5 ISDN access: dial-in number missing or wrong . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

12.1.6 ISDN port not loaded correctly / not active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

12.2 No calls are possible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

12.2.1 Call does not arrive on the gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

12.2.2 Call is rejected or not routed to the right destination address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

12.2.3 Call is rejected elsewhere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231

12.3 Software update problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231

1 About this manual

Page 7CELLX 16.2

Congratulations on the purchase of your new CELLX! This manual is set up to guide you

through the step-by-step installation of your CELLX, so that you can follow it through from

the front to the back. Quick-installation instructions appear in Chapter 4.7 Startup with

Quickstart on page 25.

Make sure you familiarize yourself thoroughly with the safety and security precautions de-

tailed in Chapter 2 Safety and security precautions before you begin to install your CELLX.

TELES is not liable for any damage or injury resulting from a failure to follow these safety and

security instructions!

1.1 Organization

This manual is organized into the following chapters.

Chapter 1 About this manual introduces the CELLX Systems Manual and how it is set

up.

Chapter 2 Safety and security precautions contains information about security issues

relevant to connection with the IP network.

Chapter 3 Overview briefly describes the CELLX and its implementation scenarios.

Chapter 4 Installation contains information on how to connect and configure the

system so that it is ready for operation.

Chapter 5 Configuration files describes the CELLX’s individual configuration files and

parameters.

Chapter 7 Mobile configuration options describes mobile configuration entries.

Chapter 8 Signaling and routing features describes configuration settings in the

route.cfg used for adjusting PRI signaling and customizing the configuration for

specific scenarios.

Chapter 9 Additional VoIP parameters contains additional configuration entries to fine-

tune communication with the VoIP peer.

Chapter 10 System maintenance and software update describes system messages that

are saved in the protocol file, as well as trace options.

Chapter 12 Troubleshooting contains troubleshooting suggestions.

1.2 Conventions

This document uses the following typographic conventions:

Bold – items from the GUI menu.

Halfbold – items from the GUI and the menu.

Code – file names, variables and constants in configuration files or commands in body

text.

"Conventions" on page 7 – cross-references can be accessed in the PDF files by a single

mouse click.

Configuration data or extracts are written in single-column tables with a gray background.

1 About this manual

Page 8CELLX 16.2

1.3 Safety symbols

The following symbols are used to indicate important information and to describe levels of

possible danger.

Note

Useful information with no safety implications.

Attention

Information that must be adhered to as it is necessary to ensure that the system functions cor-

rectly and to avoid material damage.

Warning

Danger. Could cause personal injury or damage to the system.

Dangerous voltage

Could cause injury by high voltage and/or damage the system.

Electrostatic discharge

Components at risk of discharge must be grounded before being touched.

2 Safety and security precautions

Page 10CELLX 16.2

Please be sure and take time to read this section to ensure your personal safety and proper

operation of your TELES Infrastructure System.

To avoid personal injury or damage to the system, please follow all safety instructions before

you begin working on your TELES Infrastructure System.

TELES Infrastructure Systems are CE certified and fulfill all relevant security requirements. The

manufacturer assumes no liability for consequential damages or for damages resulting from

unauthorized changes.

This chapter applies for all Access Gateways. Information that applies only for individual

Access Gateways specifies the system for which it applies.

2.1 Safety measures

2.2 FCC / Industry Canada Notice

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled en-

vironment. This equipment must be installed and operated with a minimum distance between

the antennas and persons of:

58 cm for iGATE and CELLX GSM or

20 cm for CELLX CDMA.

The minimum distance between gateway antenna and other antennas must be:

262cm for iGATE and CELLX GSM or

20 cm for CELLX CDMA.

The CELLX has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,

pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable pro-

tection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates,

uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with

the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there

is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment

does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by

Danger of electric shock - the power supplies run on 230 V. Unplug the TELES Infrastructure

System from its power source before working on the power supply or extension socket.

Bear in mind that telephone and WAN lines are also energized and can cause electric shocks.

Do not insert foreign objects into openings in the device. Conductible objects can cause short

circuits that result in fire, electric shock or damage to the device.

Do not open the TELES Infrastructure System except to install an additional TELES.Component.

Changes in the device are not permitted.

Make sure to install the system near the power source and that the power source is easily ac-

cessible. Wire your system using only the cables included in the package contents. Use only

proper ISDN and Ethernet cables. Be sure to respect country-specific regulations, standards or

guidelines for accident prevention. Failure to follow these guidelines could result in system fail-

ure or damage.

The following information applies for CELLX gateways only. Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to op-

erate the equipment.

2 Safety and security precautions

Page 11CELLX 16.2

turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference

by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the

receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

2.3 EMC protection

2.4 System security

This section describes all points crucial to the TELES Infrastructure System’s system security.

The system’s location must support normal operation of TELES Infrastructure Systems accord-

ing to EN ETS 300 386. Be sure to select the location with the following conditions in mind.

2.5 Servicing the system

Regular servicing ensures that your TELES.System runs trouble-free. Servicing also includes

looking after the room in which the system is set up. Ensure that the air-conditioning and its

filter system are regularly checked and that the premises are cleaned on a regular basis.

Use shielded cables.

Do not remove any housing components. They provide EMC protection.

Location: Make sure you install the system horizontally in a clean, dry, dust-free location. If

possible, use an air-conditioned site. The site must be free of strong electrical or magnetic

fields, which cause disrupted signals and, in extreme cases, system failure.

Temperature: The site must maintain a temperature between 32 and 113°F and provide ade-

quate ventilation. Be sure to guard against temperature fluctuations. Resulting condensation

can cause short circuiting. The humidity level may not exceed 80%.

To avoid overheating the system, make sure the site provides adequate ventilation.

Power: The site must contain a central emergency switch for the entire power source.

The site’s fuses must be calculated to provide adequate system security. The electrical facilities

must comply with applicable regulations.

The operating voltage and frequency may not exceed or fall below what is stated on the label.

Antenna: CELLX contains no provision or protective device against power surges or lightning

strikes.

The installation of the antenna must fulfill all necessary safety requirements. Employ the ser-

vices of a professional antenna installer.

2 Safety and security precautions

Page 12CELLX 16.2

2.5.1 Replacing components

If your system contains any of the following components, replace them according to the fol-

lowing table:

2.5.2 Protecting the operating system

Changing configuration data and/or SIM card positions may lead to malfunctions and/or mis-

routing, as well as possible consequential damage. Make changes at your own risk. TELES is

not liable for any possible damage resulting from or in relation to such changes. Please thor-

oughly check any changes you or a third party have made to your configuration!

To make changes in or perform tests on the database, make sure your hard disk or flash disk

contains enough storage space. Downloading the log files and deleting them from the system

on a regular basis will ensure your system’s reliability.

Be careful when deleting files that you do not delete any files necessary for system opera-

tion.To check storage space and/or delete files, use GATE Manager. For more information see

the document TELES.GATE Manager.

All files with the extension *.log can be deleted. To save files before deleting them, use the

Receive File option in GATE Manager.

The following files, if included, must not be deleted:

Table 2.1 Component life span

Component Life span

Filter pads 6 months

Power adapter 5 years

Fan 5 years

Table 2.2 Mandatory files

Mandatory files

Mandatory system files

boot.rc

crypto.vnd

crypto5.vnd

gbox.tz1

gbox5.tz1

igate.tz1

IMEIs.lst

license.key

netbsd5fs.vnd

netbsd5i

netbsd5z

2 Safety and security precautions

Page 13CELLX 16.2

2.6 CDR files

Call Detail Records are intended for analysis of the system’s activity only. They are not de-

signed to be used for billing purposes, as it may occur that the times they record are not exact.

2.7 Network security

Every day hackers develop new ways to break into systems through the Internet. While TELES

takes great care to ensure the security of its systems, any system with access through the In-

ternet is only as secure as its user makes it. Therefore, to avoid unwanted security breaches

and resulting system malfunctions, you must take the following steps to secure your TELES

system if you connect it to the Internet:

Use an application gateway or a packet firewall.

To limit access to the system to secure remote devices, delete the default route and add

individual secure network segments.

Access to the system via Telnet, FTP, GUI, or GATE Manager must be password

protected. Do not use obvious passwords (anything from sesame to your mother-in-

laws maiden name). Remember: the password that is easiest to remember is also likely

to be easiest to crack.

The firewall must be able to check the following information and only allow trusted users to

access the TELES system:

IP source address

IP destination address

Protocol (whether the packet is TCP, UDP, or ICMP)

TCP or UDP source port

TCP or UDP destination port

ICMP message type

netbsdfs.gz

netbsdi

netbsdz

start

tools.tz0

xgate.tz1

xgate.vnd

Mandatory configuration files

ip.cfg

pabx.cfg

route.cfg

Table 2.2 Mandatory files (continued)

Mandatory files

2 Safety and security precautions

Page 14CELLX 16.2

For operation and remote administration of your TELES.System, open only the following ports

only when the indicated services are used:

Table 2.3 Default ports used for specific services

Service Protocol Port

For all systems

FTP TCP 21 (default, can be set)

Telnet (for TELES debug access

only)

TCP 23 (default, can be set)

SMTP TCP 25

DNS forward UDP 53

HTTP TCP 80 (default, can be set)

SNTP UDP 123

SNMP UDP 161 (default, can be set)

H.225 registration, admission,

status

UDP 1719 (default, can be set)

H.225 signaling TCP 1720 (default, can be set)

Radius UDP 1812 (default, can be set)

Radius accounting UDP 1813 (default, can be set)

GATE Manager TCP 4445 (default, can be set)

SIP signaling UDP / TCP 5060 (default, can be set)

RTP UDP 29000-29120 (default, can be

set)

For NMS

FTP TCP 21

Telnet TCP 23

MySQL database TCP 3306

NMS protocol TCP 5000

NMS update TCP 5001

NMS task TCP 5002

NMS task TCP 5003

NMS Listen TCP 4444

For RoutingManager

Radius authentication UDP 1812

Radius accounting UDP 1813

3 Overview

3Overview

Page 16CELLX 16.2

Mobile phone charges have become an important cost factor for many companies.

The CELLX can help reduce these costs, because calls cost significantly less when they occur

between cell phones that share the same plan.

Depending on whether your system includes 4 GSM Boards, CDMA Boards, each CELLX can

provide direct access to the GSM, CDMA or UMTS mobile network with up to 32 mobile

channels – 4 mobile channels per Mobile Board or up to 8 Mobile Boards per CELLX. The

Antenna Splitter Board combines the antennas so that only one or two antennas leave the

system.

The CELLX has 2 PRI ports and VoIP functionality for up to 32 channelsCELLXs can be set up

in various national or international locations.

3.1 What’s new in version 16.2

Enhanced TLS stability in bad IP network conditions.

Initial charge now sent immediately after connect by using the InitialCharge=ON

option.

New payload G726/40 introduced.

DSS1: Improved handling of call forwarding / partial rerouting. Facility messages with 2

facility info elements are forwarded transparently from ISDN to ISDN; facility info

element in Setup message is forwarded transparently from ISDN to ISDN.

For calls from or to ISDN or VoIP, a second OAD can now be transmitted.

Improved number manipulation with VoipOad and VoipDad commands.

New system file tools.tz0 now exists in addition to netbsdfs.gz.

System files ipv4.vnd, xgate.vnd, and netbsdi discontinued starting version 16.2.

3.2 New Access Gateway product names starting version 16.1

Starting from release 16.1., TELES is dividing it’s access gateway product portfolio into

VoIPBox VoIP-ISDN gateways, compact ECOTEL mobile radio gateways and flexibly config-

urable iGATE mobile radio gateway systems in a 19” chassis. The product names now clearly

reflect the three different product lines. The following table lists the old and new access gate-

way product names.

Table 3.1 New Access Gateway product names

Old AGW Product Names New AGW Product Names since version 16.1.

VoIPBOX BRI VoIPBox BRI

VoIPBOX PRI VoIPBox PRI

VoIPBOX GSM ECOTEL GSM

VoIPBOX UMTS ECOTEL 3G

iGATE GSM iGATE GSM

iGATE 3G iGATE 3G

3Overview

Page 17CELLX 16.2

3.3 How CELLX works

The CELLX is connected to the PBX and to the mobile network.

During outgoing calls from the PBX or IP network to mobile, dialed digits are compared

with the routing-table entries for various mobile networks. The calls are then routed

through the corresponding SIMs in the CELLX and forwarded to the number dialed.

Only the connection from the SIM in the CELLX to the mobile number in the same

mobile network is charged.

Inbound c alls are forwarded to your PBX

The CELLX contains SIM cards with your company’s billing plan

3.4 Supported implementation scenarios

In each of the following scenarios, calls are routed through individual gateways into the mo-

bile network:

a) Failover application

In case of a landline connectivity failure, the PBX routes outgoing calls to the CELLX

which in turn forwards the calls directly to the mobile network.

Figure 3.1 Failover application

3Overview

Page 18CELLX 16.2

b) one-x mobile UC integration

A company’s cell-phone users have smart phones running Avaya’s one-X Mobile client.

The one-X mobile client requests a callback from the PBX via IP whenever these users

make a call. This callback is then routed through the CELLX. As soon as the callback is

answered, the PBX calls the B party and connects the call.

Figure 3.2 one-x mobile UC integration

4 Installation

Page 20CELLX 16.2

Follow the easy instructions to set up your CELLX in a matter of minutes. Implementation of

individual scenarios requires adjustments to the appropriate interfaces. Tips for basic settings

are described here. Links to relevant chapters are provided for more specific configuration

changes.

4.1 Checklist

The following checklist provides step-by-step installation instructions.

1. Check the package contents

2. Install the device

3. Connect the Ethernet

4. Connect the T1/E1 trunks (optional)

5. Connect the antennas

6. Using Quickstart, set the configuration (IP address)

7. Check functionality (using the LEDs)

8. Secure the LAN connection

9. Secure connection with the configuration program

4.2 Package contents

Your CELLX package contains the following components. Check the contents to make sure

everything is complete and undamaged. Immediately report any visible transport damages to

customer service. If damage exists, do not attempt operation without customer-service ap-

proval:

1 CELLX

1 power supply cable

1 crossover PRI cable

1 RJ-45 LAN cable with gray connectors; 3 meters

1 copy of quick installation instructions

1 CD containing Quickstart, GATE Manager, system manual and default configuration

files

Mobile antennas (optional)

4.3 Hardware description

Throughout this manual, the following boards will be referred to as Mobile Board, unless oth-

erwise specified:

4 GSM Board

CDMA Board

The CELLX is available in expansion levels from 4 to 32 mobile channels. The following pages

describe installation of the CELLX .

Figure 4.1 shows the rear view of a CELLX, which contains the following boards:

4 Installation

Page 21CELLX 16.2

From left to right:

Base Board

Mobile Board (for mobile channels 1-4)

Mobile Board (for mobile channels 5-8)

Mobile Board (for mobile channels 9-12)

Mobile Board (for mobile channels 13-16)

Optional Antenna Splitter Board

Mobile Board (for mobile channels 17-20)

Optional Mobile Board (for mobile channels 21-24)

Optional Mobile Board (for mobile channels 25-28)

Optional Mobile Board (for mobile channels 29-32)

Figure 4.1 4HU CELLX

4.4 Installation requirements

Before installing your CELLX, make sure you have the following connections in place:

Ethernet connection

Antenna connection(s)

Optional ISDN PRI connection to PBX

Power

Insert the SIM cards into the SIM card carrier, the SIM card carrier into the Mobile Board.

4.4.1 Ethernet wiring

To connect the CELLX’s Ethernet port to your local network, connect the system to an Ether-

net switch in your network. Use the three meter cable with gray connectors.

4 Installation

Page 22CELLX 16.2

4.4.2 PRI wiring

4.4.2.1 TELES to TBR12

If you are connecting an CELLX to T1/E1 and need to change the assignment of an adapter,

assign the pins as follows. Connectors on cables included with the CELLX will be gray for

TELES TE and gray for NT on the remote device, blue for TELES NT, and green for TE on the

remote device:

Figure 4.2 TELES to TBR12

4.4.3 Antenna connection

Plug an antenna cable into each of the SMA jacks. If the system contains a Antenna

Splitter Board, plug the antenna(s) in there. If not, plug them into the jacks on the

Mobile Board.

4.4.4 SIM card assignment

If your gateway is connected to a vGATE, the following information does not apply.

Each gateway has one or more slots for SIM card carriers. The SIM card carrier contains the

SIM cards for the individual mobile channels. Insert the SIM cards in the SIM card carrier and

then insert the SIM card carrier into the gateway.

SIM card carriers are available in two versions, SIM24 and SIM4, whereby the number shows

the number of available SIM card positions.

Antennas connected to the CELLX must be installed by a qulaified technician according to all

necessary safety requirements and the antenna’s installation specifications. The antenna

adaptor does not provide power surge protection.

You must configure the PINs in the pabx.cfg before inserting the SIM card carrier unless the

SIM has no PIN or the PIN is 0000.

4 Installation

Page 23CELLX 16.2

SIM cards are mounted on the front and back of the SIM24 module (Figure 4.3) or the front

of the SIM4 module (Figure 4.4). As a guide to help you distinguish top from bottom on the

SIM24 module, SIM0-5 and SIM12-17 are printed in the upper corner near the module’s han-

dle, as can be seen in Figure 4.3. The SIMs on the SIM4 module are numbered from right to

left, with one SIM assigned to each mobile channel in ascending order.

Figure 4.3 SIM24 module: front and rear view

Figure 4.4 SIM4 module

If a SIM24 carrier is used, one out of six SIM cards can be assigned to a mobile controller. To

configure that, an index has to be set in the pabx.cfg Subscriber line.

The following examples show how a SIM card at a certain position on the SIM24 carrier is

assigned to a defined mobile controller and what index it needs for assignment.

Table 4.1 shows the assignment to the mobile controllers 00 to 03. The 24 available SIM card

positions on the SIM24 carrier are listed in the body rows. The 6 different SIM cards which

are available for each mobile controller are indexed in the heading row. This index needs to

be entered in the pabx.cfg Subscriber line behind the SMSC entry. Example 4.1 shows that

the SIM card at position 0 on the SIM24 carrier is assigned to mobile controller 00 by giving

4 Installation

Page 24CELLX 16.2

it the index 1. The SIM card which is at position 1 on the SIM24 carrier is assigned to the mo-

bile controller 01 by also giving it the index 1. SIM card number 10 on the SIM24 carrier is

assigned to mobile controller 02 with the index 3. Analogously, SIM card number 11 is as-

signed to mobile controller 03 with the index 3.

The following corresponding example shows how SIM cards at position 4, 5, 6, and 7 on the

SIM24 carrier are assigned to the mobile controller 08 to 11. They all get the index 2 in the

Subscriber line.

Table 4.1 SIM card assignment to mobile controllers 1 (SIM24 carrier)

Index in Subscriber line 1 2 3 4 5 6

Controller/Subscriber00 0 4 8 12 16 20

Controller/Subscriber01 15 9 13 17 21

Controller/Subscriber02 2610 14 18 22

Controller/Subscriber03 3 7 11 15 19 23

Example 4.1 SIM card assignment to mobile controllers 1 (SIM24 carrier)

Subscriber00=TRANSPARENT GSM[0000,00000,+491770610000,1,1,1,SIM24] ALARM

Subscriber01=TRANSPARENT GSM[0000,00000,+491770610000,1,1,1,SIM24] ALARM

Subscriber02=TRANSPARENT GSM[0000,26202,+491770610000,3,1,1,SIM24] ALARM

Subscriber03=TRANSPARENT GSM[0000,00000,+491770610000,3,1,1,SIM24] ALARM

Table 4.2 SIM card assignment to mobile controllers 2 (SIM24 carrier)

Index in Subscriber line 1 2 3 4 5 6

Controller/Subscriber08 0 48121620

Controller/Subscriber09 15913 17 21

Controller/Subscriber10 2 610 14 18 22

Controller/Subscriber11 3711 15 19 23

Example 4.2 SIM card assignment to mobile controllers 2 (SIM24 carrier)

Subscriber08=TRANSPARENT GSM[0000,00000,+491770610000,2,1,1,SIM24] ALARM

Subscriber09=TRANSPARENT GSM[0000,00000,+491770610000,2,1,1,SIM24] ALARM

Subscriber10=TRANSPARENT GSM[0000,26202,+491770610000,2,1,1,SIM24] ALARM

Subscriber11=TRANSPARENT GSM[0000,00000,+491770610000,2,1,1,SIM24] ALARM

4 Installation

Page 25CELLX 16.2

In a SIM4 carrier, each SIM card corresponds with one mobile controller. In the pabx.cfg

Subscriber line each SIM card always gets the index 1, as shown in the example below.

4.5 Preparing for installation

Each computer that is to communicate with the CELLX requires a network connection. DHCP

can be used to automatically assign an IP address and the netmask. If you don’t use DHCP,

please have the following information for connection to your network available:

IP address in the local network for the CELLX to be configured

Netmask for the CELLX to be configured

Default gateway for CELLX to be configured

4.6 Hardware connection

Connect your computer with the local network

Connect the CELLX with the local network

If you choose to connect the CELLX to ISDN, use the ISDN connection cables included

in the package contents to connect the CELLX with your PBX and/or the PSTN according

to the required port configuration.

Connect the CELLX to the power supply.

4.7 Startup with Quickstart

Quickstart is an application that helps you to configure the IP settings of your CELLX quickly

and conveniently without changing any network settings on your computer.

Quickstart can be installed on any of the following operating systems:

Windows 2000

Windows XP

Windows Vista

Windows 7

If you are using any of these operating systems, please follow the instructions in this chapter.

4.7.1 Installing Quickstart

Make sure the GATE Manager is not running on your computer. To install Quickstart on your

computer, insert the CD and select Quickstart from the menu.

Example 4.3 SIM card assignment to mobile controllers (SIM4 carrier)

Subscriber00=TRANSPARENT GSM[0000,00000,+491770610000,1,1,1,SIM4] ALARM

Subscriber01=TRANSPARENT GSM[0000,00000,+491770610000,1,1,1,SIM4] ALARM

Subscriber02=TRANSPARENT GSM[0000,26202,+491770610000,1,1,1,SIM4] ALARM

Subscriber03=TRANSPARENT GSM[0000,00000,+491770610000,1,1,1,SIM4] ALARM

Bear in mind that the preconfigured CELLX’s default IP address is 192.168.1.2. If it is already

being used in your local network, you must run Quickstart without a connection to your local

network. This can occur using a back-to-back Ethernet connection from your computer to the

CELLX. If the desired IP address for the CELLX is not in your network, you must assign your

computer a temporary IP address from this range.

4 Installation

Page 26CELLX 16.2

When asked if you want to install components on your machine, click Install.

Click Next in the introduction window to begin installation of the Quickstart.

Once installation begins, click Next to install Quickstart in the predefined folder. To install it

in another location, click Browse and select a folder from the browser that appears. Then

click Next.

Click Close to exit when installation is complete.

4.7.2 Configuration with Quickstart

Now you can use Quickstart, to set up your CELLX’s IP configuration. Open Quickstart.exe.

The program will automatically search for your CELLX in the local network. For Quickstart, the

source UDP port is 57445. It might be necessary to change the firewall rules on your system.

Click Search if you would like to restart the search. When the program has found your CELLX,

it will appear in the window. As soon as it appears, you can end the search by clicking Stop.

Figure 4.5 Quickstart

The system’s icon will appear in gray if it is unconfigured. Once it has been configured, it will

appear in green. The serial number appears as the system’s name. The CELLX is partially pre-

configured. The configuration files pabx.cfg and route.cfg are already on the system. Only

the system’s IP-related entries must be set. Individual port adjustments are to be made man-

ually later. Port properties can be changed and parameters can be assigned then.

To change the appearance of the window, click Large Icons, Small Icons or Details in the

View menu. In the following description, we will use the Details View, which contains the

following columns:

Table 4.3 Quickstart details view columns

Heading Definition

Identifier This column lists the CELLX’s serial number.

IP Address This column lists the CELLX’s IP address.

Configured An X means the CELLX contains the configuration files.

# of VoIP Ctrls This column lists the number of VoIP Modules installed in the CELLX.

Each VoIP Module represents one VoIP controller.

VoIP Channels This column shows the number of VoIP channels per VoIP Module.

Type Lists the type of the system.

4 Installation

Page 27CELLX 16.2

In the Options menu, you can suppress or activate ICMP ping to test the Internet connection.

To perform the initial configuration of the system, double-click the icon or right-click and se-

lect Configure. The IP Settings dialog will appear. If you want the gateway to use a dynamic

IP address, activate the checkbox DHCP. This will deactivate the next three lines. Your DHCP

server will automatically provide all of the other necessary information. If you do not have a

DHCP server, leave the DHCP checkbox empty. The default IP address appears in the IP Ad-

dress box. Enter a new IP address. If the address you enter already exists in the network, you

will be notified to choose another address at the end of the configuration process. Enter the

system’s netmask in the Mask dialog box. Enter the IP address for the Default Gateway.

Click Finish.

Figure 4.6 Quickstart configuration: IP settings

Now the IP settings are configured; all other processes run automatically. First the system’s IP

address will be changed and then the system will start with the new IP address.

If you right-click the system’s icon in the main window and choose Temporarily Configure

IP Address, only the IP address for the system’s first Ethernet interface and the netmask will

be temporary changed. This can be helpful if you want to set up local remote access to the

Box An X means the system is a VoIPBox BRI.

CF Mounted An X means the CELLX contains a compact flash disk.

Table 4.3 Quickstart details view columns (continued)

Heading Definition

There is no internal time generation for the system when the power is interrupted. That means

the default time is used when the system is restarted or rebooted! Therefore it is important to

set the system time with an NTP server.

If the system is connected via ISDN, a clock may come from the network connected to the cor-

responding port. Enter TIME in the pabx.cfg’s Subscriber line for the TE port to retrieve the

time from the port.

4 Installation

Page 28CELLX 16.2

system and use other IP settings on the remote device than the system’s IP configuration in

the network. Bear in mind that the functions on the system’s first Ethernet interface work

with the new settings.

Now you can complete the system’s configuration using the GUI (please see Chapter 4.8 Star-

tup via GUI on page 28).

4.8 Startup via GUI

System configuration can occur via the GUI.

Figure 4.7 GUI

We recommend you use Internet Explorer 6/7/8. Simply open a browser, enter the system’s

IP address in the address bar, and click Login in the navigation menu on the left. Enter the

username teles-carrier and the password tcs-carrier to access the system.

Figure 4.8 GUI faststart

Using the navigation menu on the left, click Faststart to configure the system. Follow the

steps as they appear.

4 Installation

Page 29CELLX 16.2

To edit the default configuration, follow the directions in Chapter 5 Configuration files. Up-

load the configuration files into the /boot directory.

4.9 LED functionality

4.9.1 Ethernet port LEDs

Each ethernet port has 2 LEDs to show its status. The left LED blinks to indicate data traffic.

The right LED is currently not used.

4.9.2 Base Board PRI port LEDs

Each PRI port has one red and one green LED to show the port’s status.

The red LED displays the status of the bypass relay that connects the ports with each other

when the relay between the PRI ports is off. That means when the system is connected be-

tween a PBX and the PSTN, it is transparent when the LED is red.

The green LED displays whether or not layer 1 is active on the PRI port’s connected cable.

4.9.3 Mobile Board SIM card LEDs

On the spine of the Mobile Board, to the right of the SIM card module, two columns of green

LEDs display the status of each mobile channel.

Figure 4.9 Mobile Board SIM card LEDs

Table 4.4 Base Board PRI Port LEDs

LED Description

Red ON The system and bypass relay are inactive (normal-

ly during the startup phase).

Red OFF The system has started and the bypass relay is ac-

tive.

Green ON Layer 1 is active.

Green OFF Layer 1 is inactive.

4 Installation

Page 30CELLX 16.2

The LEDs in the upper column show the general operational status of the SIM cards, while

the status of the mobile channels is displayed in the lower column.

Table 4.5 contains a description of the LEDs and what they mean:

Table 4.5 Mobile Board LEDs

Operational Status Connection Status Definition

OFF OFF The mobile channel is not oper-

ational because:

No external power supply

SIM module slot is empty

No SIM card

OFF Blinking slowly Not possible

OFF Blinking quickly Not possible

OFF ON Not possible

Blinking slowly OFF The SIM card is attached, but

the mobile channel is not oper-

ational because:

Mobile channel is in logon

phase

Mobile channel’s status is

unknown

Blinking slowly Blinking slowly Not possible

Blinking slowly ON Not possible

Blinking quickly OFF The mobile channel is not oper-

ational because:

SIM card has been blocked

Reception field strength

below limit

Blinking quickly Blinking slowly Not possible

Blinking quickly Blinking quickly Status during initializing phase

(system start up). Display

changes when status of mobile

changes.

Blinking quickly ON Not possible

ON OFF The mobile channel is opera-

tional, the SIM card has logged

on.

ON Blinking slowly Not possible

ON Blinking quickly The mobile channel is opera-

tional, the SIM card has logged

on, a connection is being set up

on this channel

ON ON The mobile channel is opera-

tional, the SIM card has logged

on, a connection has been set

up on this channel

4 Installation

Page 31CELLX 16.2

4.10 Remote access and access security

After the system has been configured and all cables are connected, remote administration

and maintenance can occur with the GATE Manager (Chapter 4.10.1), the GUI

(Chapter 4.10.2)or via FTP (Chapter 4.10.3).

4.10.1 GATE Manager

Figure 4.10 GATE Manager

The GATE Manager administration and maintenance software offers a broad range of func-

tions. The GATE Manager is user friendly and can be customized to suit your needs.

The following maintenance functions are possible:

Display system information and network element status.

Retrieve and display configuration files.

Restart network elements.

Use of a trace option for checking functions and fault diagnosis. Option to use an

external tool, for example to display and break down trace data.

Update the system software and configuration tables.

Retrieve CDRs (Call Detail Records).

Display the current connections (status).

Display statistical information for network elements and interfaces.

Display the status of the interfaces.

Use the CD enclosed in your package contents to install the GATE Manager. For a detailed

description of installation and implementation of the GATE Manager, please refer to the

GATE Manager and Utilities Programs Manual.

GATE Manager remote access can occur via IP or ISDN. GATE Manager access via IP uses port

4444 as source TCP port and port 4445 as destination port. You can change the port in the

pabx.cfg file using the following parameter: MoipPort=4567.

Bear in mind that the same port must be configured in the GATE Manager. The TCP port can

be specified behind the IP address and a colon: IP:172.20.25.5:4567.

In the default configuration, ISDN remote access is disabled. To configure the system so that

certain data calls are received as remote administration calls, make the following changes in

the pabx.cfg:

RemoteCode=BBB

Add the following mapping to the route.cfg:

MapAll<direct>=BBB DATA

Make the following entries in the route.cfg if the system is to handle all ISDN data calls as

remote-administration calls:

4 Installation

Page 32CELLX 16.2

MapAll?=BBB DATA

4.10.2 Graphical user interface (GUI)

Remote access can occur via the GUI. Even users with little experience can easily configure

standard system settings with this interface. Simply open a browser and enter the system’s IP

address in the address bar.

Figure 4.11 GUI

The following administrative levels apply:

Carrier mode (full access)

User: teles-carrier

Password: tcs-carrier

All configuration pages can be accessed in this mode.

Example 4.4 Carrier mode (full access)

[httpd]

PwdUser=k24X0sdc.uMcM

PwdAdmin=k2UMj19qtovzI

PwdCarrier=k2jryo6Xd5vN6

Never copy these entries from one system to another, as the encryption is unique for each sys-

tem.

4 Installation

Page 33CELLX 16.2

Administrator Mode

User: teles-admin

Password: tcs-admin

This access level is for the user network’s administrator. All IP and routing entries, with the

exception of VoIP carrier entries, can be set here.

Read-Only Mode

User: teles-user

Password: tcs-user

No configuration changes can be made at this level. Only status and statistics can be retrieved.

Of course, these configuration levels correspond with the most important scenarios. The pass-

words are saved in the ip.cfg in encrypted form:

PwdCarrier=<crypt>

PwdAdmin=<crypt>

PwdUser=<crypt>

The user interface is divided into the following main sections:

All of the user interface’s pages contain Help buttons and links to the online help, which pro-

vides a detailed description of all of the individual configuration settings.

4.10.3 FTP

Remote access can also occur via FTP. You can use FTP to transfer configuration files. You can

also carry out functions and traces with raw commands. Use the username teles and the

defined password to connect to the system with FTP.

Table 4.6 GUI: sections

Section Description

User Data Here you can change the user passwords and the language for

the GUI.

Faststart Faststart helps you to configure the system settings of

your quickly and conveniently.

System Settings IP Settings: Settings for the Ethernet interfaces and related

services.

Port Settings: Settings for the ECOTEL GSM ports.

VoIP Settings: VoIP settings for the SIP or H.323 carrier.

Telephony Routing:Routings for telephone numbers.

System Overview Overview of system information and drivers.

Commands Here you can activate a configuration or restart the system.

4 Installation

Page 34CELLX 16.2

The following entries in the pabx.cfg ensure the security of your FTP access:

Once you have access to the system, you will be in the folder /home/teles. To upload or

download configuration files change to the directory /boot. To download log files, change

to the directory /data if the system contains a flash disk. Otherwise change to the directory

/boot.

The following commands can be carried out via FTP access:

If your FTP client does not support the site command, try “literal site” instead.

4.10.4 Setting a password for remote access

The following entry ensures the security of your remote access. Use the mkpwd.exe tool to

generate the password. You will find it on the enclosed CD in the directory pwd.

Start the program in a command window with the entry mkpwd <password>. The output

shows the encrypted password. Enter the encrypted password in the configuration file

pabx.cfg’s parameter line as follows.

Table 4.7 FTP security entries

FTP Security

FtpdPort=<port>

Defines the FTP access port (default 21).

RemotePassword=<password>

Defines the password for FTP and GATE Manager access. Please refer to Chapter 4.10.4 for in-

structions on how to enter an encrypted password in the pabx.cfg. If you do not define a pass-

word, access to the system via GATE Manager occurs without a password, and FTP access occurs

with the default password tcs-ag.

Table 4.8 FTP commands

Command Function

site xgboot Boots the entire system.

site xgact Activates the configuration.

site xgact 1-19 Activates the Night section corresponding with

the number 1-19.

site xgtrace 0 Deactivates trace.

site xgtrace 1 Activates layer 2 trace.

site xgtrace 2 Activates layer 3 trace.

Example 4.5 Password for remote access

RemotePassword=<crypt>

4 Installation

Page 35CELLX 16.2

When the file has been transferred to the system and the configuration has been activated,

access to the system can occur only with the password. Don’t forget to memorize the pass-

word!

If you do not define a password, access to the system via GATE Manager occurs without a

password, and FTP access occurs with the default password tcs-ag.

5 Configuration files

Page 37CELLX 16.2

This chapter describes the basic setup and the most commonly used entries for the configu-

ration files. Configuration of CELLXs is managed in the following three files:

The default configuration with the IP address 192.168.1.2 is active when the files are not on

the system. You can configure the files using GATE Manager or via FTP (user teles, password

tcs-ag). If you use the GUI to make configuration changes, the files will be adjusted automat-

ically.

Make sure you secure the system with new passwords following configuration and remember

to memorize the passwords!

These configuration files contain all system-specific settings and are used when the system

starts. Comments included in these files must begin with a semicolon. They do not need to

be at the beginning of a line. Configuration files must end with an empty line.

Please save a backup of the files pabx.cfg and route.cfg before starting configuration.

The configuration files follow these conventions: Individual files are divided into sections.

These sections always begin with a line entry in square brackets. The basic required sections

are in these files:

Table 5.1 Configuration files

File Function

ip.cfg This file is for the basic configuration of the

Ethernet interfaces.

pabx.cfg This file is for system-specific and port-specific

settings.

route.cfg This file is for call-routing entries.

Changing configuration data and/or SIM card positions may lead to malfunctions and/or mis-

routing, as well as possible consequential damage. All changes are made at own risk. TELES

is not liable for any possible damage out of or in relation with such changes. Please do there-

fore thoroughly check any changes you or a third party have made to your configuration.

Table 5.2 Required configuration file sections

Section File Function

[System] pabx.cfg

route.cfg

ip.cfg

This section contains the sys-

tem’s basic settings.

[Night<num>]

EXAMPLE:

[Night1]

[Night2]

pabx.cfg

route.cfg

This section contains time de-

pendent entries that only apply

for limited times.

[emac0] ip.cfg This section contains the IP

configuration for the first

Ethernet interface.

5 Configuration files

Page 38CELLX 16.2

5.1 Configuration file ip.cfg

The basic settings for the two Ethernet interfaces are entered here. One interface usually suf-

fices. The second interface can be used for special requirements, for example as a hub port,

DSL router or vLAN interface. Generally, these settings are entered once and then left un-

changed.

This file contains the following sections, which must appear in the order given:

5.1.1 System section configuration

The [System] section contains entries that define the default gateway and/or special routing

entries.

To define the standard gateway, use the following entry to set the IP address:

DefaultGw=<ip addr>

Table 5.3 Sections in the ip.cfg file

Section Function

[System] (required) This section contains entries that define the default gateway

and/or special routing entries.

[emac0] (required)

[emac1] (optional)

The Ethernet Media Access Controller section(s) define the

physical Ethernet interface(s).

[nat] (optional) This section includes settings for Network Address Translation.

[bridge0] (optional) These section(s) contain settings for the second Ethernet con-

troller in bridge mode.

[pppoe<x>] (optional) These sections contain settings for direct connection between

the system and the DSLAM when the PPPoE protocol is used.

<x> can be 0 or 1.

[firewall] (optional) This section contains settings for activating the system’s fire-

wall.

[altqd] (optional) This section enables prioritization of VoIP packets in the CELLX

through an IP network using bandwidth control.

[dhcpd] (optional) This sections contains a list of parameters and settings for the

DHCP server in the system. It is divided into global settings for

the server and parameters for the DHCP subnet.

[xppp<x>] (optional) This section contains settings for point-to-point dial-up setup

via ISDN.

[vlan<x>] (optional) These section(s) contain settings for the virtual networks. <x>

can be anything from 0 to 9.

Example 5.1 System section configuration 1

[System]

DefaultGw=192.168.1.254

5 Configuration files

Page 39CELLX 16.2

If you must route specific net ranges to gateways other than what is defined in the default

route, make the following entries in the [System] section:

Route=<target range> -netmask <ip mask> <ip gateway>

If only certain routes apply, leave the line DefaultGw empty.

5.1.2 Ethernet interface configuration

The system includes two Ethernet interfaces (emac0 and emac1). Only the first is active in the

default configuration. Therefore, make sure you plug the cable into the right controller. The

second Ethernet interface can be configured as needed.

The following settings are possible for the sections [emac0] (matched to the first Ethernet

controller) and [emac1] (matched to the second Ethernet controller):

IpAddress=<ip addr>/<netmask>

The IP address is entered in decimal notation, followed by a slash (/) and the netmask in bit

notation.

The following entry is used to allocate an IP address via DHCP:

IpAddress=dhcp

The following entry is used in the [emac1] section if operation of the system occurs in bridge

mode.

IpAddress=up

5.1.3 GUI settings

The following parameter is used to change the GUI port in the section [httpd] (default 80):

GuiPort=<num>

Bear in mind that the passwords for different access levels are not set here. The encrypted

passwords are stored here and can only be changed via GUI (see Chapter 4.10.2 on page 32).

Example 5.2 System section configuration 2

[System]

DefaultGw=192.168.1.254

Route=10.0.0.0 -netmask 255.0.0.0 192.168.1.1

Example 5.3 Ethernet interface configuration

IpAddress=192.168.1.2/24

Example 5.4 GUI settings

[httpd]

GuiPort=80

PwdUser=k24X0sdc.uMcM

PwdAdmin=k2UMj19qtovzI

PwdCarrier=k2jryo6Xd5vN6

5 Configuration files

Page 40CELLX 16.2

5.1.4 Bridge configuration

A bridge can connect two networks with each other. A bridge works like a hub, forwarding

traffic from one interface to another. Multicast and broadcast packets are always forwarded

to all interfaces that are part of the bridge. This can occur on the Ethernet or VLAN level:

BrConfig=add <interface-x> add <interface-y> up

Activating another Ethernet interface in this way is useful, for example, when the Ethernet

switch does not have any more ports available for connection of the system. You can simply

unplug a cable and plug it into the system’s second Ethernet interface.

5.1.5 NAT configuration

The NAT (Network Address Translation) module translates IP addresses from the local net-

work to an IP address or range on a public interface. All rules are defined in the [nat] section:

Example 5.5 Bridge configuration

[bridge0]

BrConfig=add emac0 add emac1 up

Table 5.4 NAT configuration

map=<interface> <local network address/mask> -> <public network address/mask> <op-

tional entries>

This parameter maps the IP address in the local network to the IP address in the public network.

<interface> Defines the translated interface or protocol:

emac1 The system’s second Ethernet interface

pppoe0 Protocol used for DSL connections

xppp<0> Protocol used for ISDN and CDMA dial-up

connections

<local network address/mask> The IP address is entered in decimal notation, followed by a

slash (/) and the netmask in bit notation. The entire local net-

work range is configured.

<public network address/mask> Defines the public network range, with network address and

mask (usually exactly one address), into which the local IP ad-

dresses are to be translated. The IP address is entered in dec-

imal notation, followed by a slash (/) and the netmask in bit

notation.

<optional entries> Special rules can be defined for some services or protocols.

The system can serve as a proxy for FTP:

proxy port ftp ftp/tcp

Special ports for the public address(es) can be assigned for the

protocols TCP and UDP. The range is defined by the start and

end ports:

portmap tcp/udp <start port>:<end port>

If no optional entry is defined, all other addresses will be

translated without special rules.

rdr=<interface> <public network address/mask> port <port> -> <local network address/

mask> port <port_number> <protocol>

This parameter sends packets from one port and IP address to another.

5 Configuration files

Page 41CELLX 16.2

The following NAT settings are for a system in which PPPoE (DSL) is used toward the Internet.

The local network range 192.168.1.0 Class C is translated with the following rules:

The proxy mode is used for FTP.

All other TCP and UDP packets are mapped to the external ports 40000 to 60000.

There are no special rules for any other services.

Incoming requests to port 80 and 443 in the public IP address 192.168.1.100 are

redirected to ports 80 and 443 in the local IP address 192.168.1.100.

5.1.6 PPPoE configuration

The protocol Point-to-Point over Ethernet is used for DSL communication with the DSLAM.

That means the system can connect directly with a DSL modem.

All necessary information for setup of the PPPoE connection is defined in the [pppoe<x>] sec-

tion. That means username, password and authentication protocol are set here. The Ethernet

interface is emac1 and the gateway can also be defined. The parameter PppoeIf defines the

physical Ethernet interface used (always emac1). The settings are entered as follows: Bear in

mind that configuration of the firewall, the NAT module and prioritization of the VoIP packets

must be considered when routing voice and data through the DSL line.

<interface> Defines the translated interface or protocol:

emac1 The system’s second Ethernet interface

pppoe0 Protocol used for DSL connections

Protocol used for ISDN and CDMA dial-up connections

<public network address/mask> Defines the public network range, with network address and

mask (usually exactly one address), into which the local IP ad-

dresses are to be translated. The IP address is entered in dec-

imal notation, followed by a slash (/) and the netmask in bit

notation.

<port> Defines the port number.

<local network address/mask> The IP address is entered in decimal notation, followed by a

slash (/) and the netmask in bit notation. The entire local net-

work range is configured.

<protocol> Defines the protocol. tcp and udp are possible.

watch=<interface 1> <interface 2> ... <interface n>

Enter all interfaces that you have configured. If an interface is activated, the NAT table is resetted to

ensure correct IP address translation.

Table 5.4 NAT configuration (continued)

Example 5.6 NAT configuration

[nat]

map=emac1 192.168.1.0/24 -> 0/32 proxy port ftp ftp/tcp

map=emac1 192.168.1.0/24 -> 0/32 portmap tcp/udp 40000:60000

map=emac1 192.168.1.0/24 -> 0/32

rdr=emac1 0/0 port 80 -> 192.168.1.100 port 80 tcp

rdr=emac1 0/0 port 443 -> 192.168.1.100 port 443 tcp

5 Configuration files

Page 42CELLX 16.2

The following entry will create the interface pppoe0, with the username user and the pass-

word pwd. The PAP authentication protocol is used. The default route occurs via DSL.

5.1.7 Firewall settings

In the following example, only port 4445 allows incoming connections from the IP address

192.168.1.10. All others will be blocked.

Example 5.7 PPPoE configuration

[pppoe0]

PppoeIf=emac1

User=user

Pwd=pwd

AuthProto=pap

Route=0.0.0.0

The firewall settings provide options for limiting or denying access to and from the system. If

you do not configure this section, the firewall is inactive and access is unlimited. Make sure

you configure the firewall rules carefully. The rules are processed from top to bottom. If you

use the option quick, you will break the sequence. We recomend that you put the most re-

strictive rule at the end of the configuration.

Example 5.8 Firewall settings 1

[firewall]

fw=pass in quick on emac0 proto tcp from 192.168.1.10/32 to any port

eq 4445 flags S keepstate keep frags

fw=block in log quick on emac0 all

Table 5.5 Settings in the [firewall] section of the ip.cfg

[firewall]

fw=<mode> <direction> <list>

<mode> Two modes are possible for permitting or deny-

ing access:

pass permit access

block deny access

<direction> Possible directions are in and out:

in external to internal

out internal to external

<list> All other entries specify the other settings for the

corresponding firewall rules and are optional.

The order in the line is as listed below:

log

Records non-matching packets.

5 Configuration files

Page 43CELLX 16.2

quick

Allows short-cut rules in order to speed up the filter or override later rules. If a packet matches

a filter rule that is marked as quick, this rule will be the last rule checked, allowing a short-circuit

path to avoid processing later rules for this packet. If this option is missing, the rule is taken to

be a "fall-through rule, meaning that the result of the match (block/pass) is saved and that pro-

cessing will continue to see if there are any more matches.

on <interface>

The firewall rule is used only for the defined interface (for example emac0, pppoe0).

from <networkaddress/mask>

to <networkaddress/mask>

from defines the source IP-address range for incoming packets. to defines the target IP-address

range for outgoing packets. The IP address appears in decimal notation, followed by a slash (/)

and the netmask in bit notation. any stands for all IP addresses (example: to any).

NOTE: If you use the rule pass in/out in combination with the option from <ip> to <ip>,

you must specify a protocol number with proto and a port number. If you not specify the

port, the system may not be reachable.

EXAMPLE:

fw=pass in quick on pppoe0 proto tcp from any to any port eq 4445

proto <protocol>

defines the protocol, for which the rule is valid (example: proto tcp, proto udp, proto icmp).

port eq <num>

<num> defines the port as number (example: port eq 4445).

keep state

Ensures that the firewall checks packets from the beginning to the end of a session. This is nec-

essary, as the firewall cannot process when a session begins or ends.

flags S

Only syn. packets are accepted and recorded in the state table. In conjunction with keep state,

packets from sessions that have been inactive will also be routed. The advantage of this entry is

that random packets will not be accepted.

keep frags

Fragmented packets are also routed.

Table 5.5 Settings in the [firewall] section of the ip.cfg (continued)

[firewall]

fw=<mode> <direction> <list>

5 Configuration files

Page 44CELLX 16.2

5.1.8 Bandwidth control

In many implementation scenarios, the CELLX in router mode (for example as DSL router)

sends voice and data traffic through a connection with limited bandwidth. This can lead to

lost voice packets that arrive too late to be used in the voice stream. To avoid lost packets,

this QOS setting prioritizes packet transmission. You must set the priority for voice signaling

and for the voice packets. That means you must prioritize SIP/H.323, RTP and RTCP. You will

find the ports used in Table 5.14, in the following entries:

H225Port

SipPort

VoipRtp Port

VoipRtpPortSpacing

Different ports are used for RTP and RTCP, depending on the configuration.

The parameter VoipRtpPort shows the first RTP port used. The corresponding RTCP port is the

next one up. The parameter VoipRtpPortSpacing shows the next RTP port (RTP port + port

spacing).

Example 5.9 Firewall settings 2

[firewall]

; loopback

fw=pass in quick on emac0 all

fw=pass out quick on emac0 all

; traffic to outgoing

fw=pass out quick on pppoe0 proto tcp all flags S keep state keep frags

fw=pass out quick on pppoe0 proto udp all keep state keep frags

fw=pass out quick on pppoe0 proto icmp all keep state keep frags

; incoming traffic

fw=pass in quick on pppoe0 proto tcp from 10.4.0.0/16 to any port eq 21 flags S

keep state keep frags

fw=pass in quick on pppoe0 proto tcp from 10.4.0.0/16 to any port eq 23 flags S

keep state keep frags

fw=pass in quick on pppoe0 proto tcp from 10.4.0.0/16 to any port eq 4445 keep

state

; icmp traffic

fw=pass in quick on pppoe0 proto icmp all keep state

; other will be blocked

fw=block in log quick on pppoe0 all

fw=block out log quick on pppoe0 all

Table 5.6 Settings in the [altqd] section of the ip.cfg

Interface=<interface> bandwidth <bw> priq

Defines the interface for which the rule applies.

<interface> Sets the interface for which prioritization applies

(e.e. pppoe0).

<bw> Sets the bandwidth that is available on the inter-

face in Kbit/s (for example 256K).

priq Priority qeueing. A higher priority class is always

served first.

classPrio=<interface> <class> root priority <prio>

5 Configuration files

Page 45CELLX 16.2

In the following example, prioritization is set for a thirty-channel VoIP connection. The SIP sig-

naling port 5060 and the RTP/RTCP ports 29000 to 29059 are prioritized at level 7. All other

services are set at level 0.

Defines the priority of the filter entries.

<class> Two types can be set:

realtime_class (VoIP packets)

regular_class (data packets)

<prio> Enter a value between 0 and 15. The higher the

value (for example 15), the higher the priority.

Filter=<interface> <class> <values>

Defines the individual rules for the class.

<values> The individual values are divided into the follow-

ing entries. A 0 can be entered as a wildcard, in

which case all values are possible:

<dest_addr> (can be followed by netmask

<mask>)

<dest_port>

<src_addr> (can be followed by netmask

<mask>)

<src_port>

<protocol tos value>:

6 for TCP

17 for UDP

Table 5.6 Settings in the [altqd] section of the ip.cfg (continued)

Interface=<interface> bandwidth <bw> priq

Example 5.10 Bandwidth control

[altqd]

interface pppoe0 bandwidth 512K priq

class priq pppoe0 realtime_class root priority 7

filter pppoe0 realtime_class 0 5060 0 0 0

filter pppoe0 realtime_class 0 0 0 5060 0

filter pppoe0 realtime_class 0 29000 0 0 17

filter pppoe0 realtime_class 0 0 0 29000 17

filter pppoe0 realtime_class 0 29001 0 0 17

filter pppoe0 realtime_class 0 0 0 29001 17

....

filter pppoe0 realtime_class 0 29058 0 0 17

filter pppoe0 realtime_class 0 0 0 29058 17

filter pppoe0 realtime_class 0 29059 0 0 17

filter pppoe0 realtime_class 0 0 0 29059 17

class priq pppoe0 regular_class root priority 0 default

5 Configuration files

Page 46CELLX 16.2

5.1.9 DHCP server settings

The DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server provides a mechanism for allocation

of IP addresses to client hosts. The [dhcpd] section contains a list of parameters and settings

for the DHCP server in the system. It is divided into global settings for the server and param-

eters for the DHCP subnet.

Table 5.7 Settings in the [dhcpd] section of the ip.cfg

[dhcpd]

; Global dhcpd parameters

allow unknown-clients;

All DHCP queries are accepted and the configured settings are transmitted to the clients.

ddns-update-style none;

Deactivates dynamic update of the domain name system as per RFC 2136.

; Parameters for the Subnet

subnet <network address> netmask <mask for network range> {<list>}

In <list> you can enter any of the following specific network settings activated by the DHCP server.

Each oprion must begin in a new line and end with a semicolon (;).

range <start IP address> <end IP address>;

The DHCP network range is defined by the first and last address in the range. Client assignment

begins with the last address.

option broadcast-address <IP address>;

Defines the broadcast address for the clients in the subnet.

option domain-name "<string>";

Defines the domain name used in the network.

option domain-name-servers <IP address>;

Defines the DNS-server address to be assigned (as per RFC 1035)

All of the following optional entries defining server addresses are also transmitted as per RFC

1035. Separate multiple addresses per server with a comma:

… <IP address>, <IP address>;

(this also applies for all other optional entries with IP addresses).

option netbios-name-servers <IP address>

Defines the WINS-server address to be assigned.

option ntp-servers <ip address>;

Defines the NTP-server address to be assigned.

option time-servers <ip address>;

Defines the time-server address to be assigned (RFC 868).

option routers <IP address>;

Defines the router address to be assigned.

option subnet-mask <net mask>;

Defines the netmask to be assigned (as per RFC 950).

option tftp-server-name "<link>";

Defines the TFTP server name (option 66), as per RFC 2132.

EXAMPLE: option tftp-server-name "http://192.168.0.9";

5 Configuration files

Page 47CELLX 16.2

5.1.10 DNSmasq settings

Dnsmasq is an easy to configure DNS forwarder. It is designed to provide DNS to a small net-

work.

Example 5.11 DHCP server settings

[dhcpd]

; Global dhcp parameters

allow unknown-clients;

ddns-update-style none;

; Parameter for the Subnet

subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 {

range 192.168.1.3 192.168.1.20;

option broadcast-address 192.168.1.255;

option domain-name "company.de";

option domain-name-servers 192.168.1.100;

option routers 192.168.1.2;

option subnet-mask 255.255.255.0;

}

Table 5.8 Settings in the [dnsmasq] section of the ip.cfg

[dnsmasq]

bogus-priv

Bogus private reverse lookups. All reverse lookups for private IP ranges (ie 192.168.x.x, etc) which

are not found in /etc/hosts or the DHCP leases file are answered with "no such domain" rather

than being forwarded upstream.

filterwin2k

Later versions of windows make periodic DNS requests which don't get sensible answers from the

public DNS and can cause problems by triggering dial-on-demand links. This flag turns on an op-

tion to filter such requests. The requests blocked are for records of types SOA and SRV, and type

ANY where the requested name has underscores, to catch LDAP requests.

user=<username>

Specify the userid to which dnsmasq will change after startup. Dnsmasq must normally be started

as root, but it will drop root privileges after startup by changing id to another user. Normally this

user is "nobody" but that can be over-ridden with this switch.

cache-size=<cachesize>

Set the size of dnsmasq's cache. The default is 150 names. Setting the cache size to zero disables

caching.

clear-on-reload

Whenever /etc/resolv.conf is re-read, clear the DNS cache. This is useful when new nameservers

may have different data than that held in cache.

Example 5.12 DNSmasq settings

bogus-priv

filterwin2k

user=teles

cache-size=150

cler-on-reload

5 Configuration files

Page 48CELLX 16.2

5.1.11 PPP configuration for mobile and ISDN dial-up

The point-to-point protocol is used for dial-up connections via GPRS/3G or CMDA, or via ISDN

lines. The system can set up an mobile Internet connection for the companies’ local users or

an ISDN data link between subsidiaries of the company.

The mobile internet access can be used as regular internet access for small companies or as

an internet back up solution.

The ISDN dial-up can be used to transmit VoIP calls.

The advantages of VoIP over ISDN can be seen especially in corporate implementation. For

example, it is useful when a very high number of connections occurs between subsidiaries and

one subsidiary does not have a broadband Internet connection. An ISDN B-channel can be

connected to the Internet and up to six voice calls can occur simultaniously over one ISDN line.

All necessary information for setup of the PPP connection is defined in the section [xp-

pp<num>].

Table 5.9 Settings in the [xppp] section of the ip.cfg

[xppp<num>]

Dad=<num>

Enter the dial-up number. Only digits can be defined here. Any required special characters (* or

#) can be set in the mapping entry.

User=<username>

Enter a username.

Pwd=<password>

Enter a password.

Route=<ip-addr>

Enter the target IP address range, for example 0.0.0.0 (default route).

AuthProto=<protocol>

Enter chap or pap for the protocol used for authentication.

AutoUp=<int>

Defines if the PPP interface is activated automatically after system start. The following values are

possible:

0 = No automatic PPP activation (default)

1 = Automatic PPP activation

IdleTO=<sec>

Enter the number of seconds without traffic before the interface tears down the connection.

MTU=<int>

Maximum Transfer Unit. We recommend the following default values:

1500 for ISDN dial-up and 120 for CDMA dial-up.

Rfc1662=<val>

Framing to be used:

0 for ISDN or 1 for CDMA

LcpTO=<msec>

Allows you to change the value of the LCP timeout. The timeout-value must be specified in milli-

seconds (default 1000).

StartDelay=<sec>

Time in seconds the system will wait to start the ppp process.

5 Configuration files

Page 49CELLX 16.2

Make sure you configure the firewall and NAT options accordingly.

5.1.12 VLAN configuration

A VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) is a virtual LAN within a physical network. Each VLAN is

assigned a unique number (VLAN ID) and defined in the [vlan<x>] section with

Tag: value between 1 and 4095

Priority: value between 0 and 7 (0 is lowest and 7 is the highest priority)

[vlan0]

IfConfig=vlan <tag>,<priority> vlanif <interface>

The following entry will create the interface vlan1, with VLAN tag 10 and priority 7, on the

Ethernet interface emac0. Following this configuration, IP addresses (and/or other protocols)

can be assigned to the vlan1 interface.

DNS=<bitmask>

Enter here to which of the carrier’s DNS server the gateway shall send the DNS request. The fol-

lowing values are possible:

1 = primary DNS server

2 = secondary DNS server

3 = both servers

OwnIP=<IP address>

A temporay IP address assigned to the interface (such as 0.0.0.0). This address is valid until an IP

address has been assigned to the interface by the carrier. Not needed for the xppp0 interface.

PeerIP=<IP address>

The IP address that is configured for the peer (such as 0.0.0.1). Not needed for the xxxp0 interface,

each other interface has to have a different peer IP address.

Example 5.13 PPP configuration for ISDN and CDMA dial-up

[xppp0]

Dad=12345

User=user

Pwd=pwd

Route=0.0.0.0

AuthProto=chap

IdleTO=60

MTU=1500

Rfc1662=0

LcpTO=500

StartDelay=10

AutoUp=1

Table 5.9 Settings in the [xppp] section of the ip.cfg (continued)

[xppp<num>]

Example 5.14 VLAN configuration

[vlan1]

IfConfig=vlan 10,7 vlanif emac0

IpAddress=192.168.199.1

5 Configuration files

Page 50CELLX 16.2

5.1.13 Examples

5.1.13.1 Default configuration

In the following example, the system’s IP address is 192.168.1.1, the netmask is

255.255.255.0, and the standard gateway is 192.168.1.254.

5.1.13.2 Active ethernet bridge

In the following example a two-port Ethernet bridge is configured. The system’s IP address is

192.168.1.1, the netmask is 255.255.255.0, and the standard gateway is 192.168.1.254,

The emac1 interface is active and both Ethernet interfaces are set to bridge mode in the

[bridge0] section.

Example 5.15 Default configuration

[System]

DefaultGw=192.168.1.254

[emac0]

IpAddress=192.168.1.1/24

Example 5.16 Active ethernet bridge

[System]

DefaultGw=192.168.1.254

[emac0]

IpAddress=192.168.1.1/24

[emac1]

IpAddress=up

[bridge0]

BrConfig=add emac0 add emac1 up

5 Configuration files

Page 51CELLX 16.2

5.1.13.3 Integrated DSL-router scenario for VoIP

In the following example, the system is connected to the local IP network through emac0. The

DSL modem is connected to the emac1 interface, which enables the system to connect direct-

ly to the Internet without an additional router when the connection is used only for VoIP data.

A DHCP server is used for dynamic IP-address allocation.

Example 5.17 Integrated DSL-router scenario for VoIP traffic with an active DHCP server and firewall

[System]

[emac0]

IpAddress=192.168.0.2/24

[emac1]

IpAddress=up

[pppoe0]

PppoeIf=emac1

User=usertelekom

Pwd=pwd

AuthProto=chap

Route=default

[nat]

map=pppoe0 192.168.0.0/24 -> 0/32 proxy port ftp ftp/tcp

map=pppoe0 192.168.0.0/24 -> 0/32 portmap tcp/udp 40000:60000

map=pppoe0 192.168.0.0/24 -> 0/32

[firewall]

; loopback

fw=pass in quick on emac0 all

fw=pass out quick on emac0 all

; traffic to outgoing

fw=pass out quick on pppoe0 proto tcp all flags S keep state keep frags

fw=pass out quick on pppoe0 proto udp all keep state keep frags

fw=pass out quick on pppoe0 proto icmp all keep state keep frags

; incoming traffic

fw=pass in quick on pppoe0 proto tcp from 10.4.0.0/16 to any port eq 21 flags S

keep state keep frags

fw=pass in quick on pppoe0 proto tcp from 10.4.0.0/16 to any port eq 23 flags S

keep state keep frags

fw=pass in quick on pppoe0 proto tcp from 10.4.0.0/16 to any port eq 4445 keep

state

; icmp traffic

fw=pass in quick on pppoe0 proto icmp all keep state

; other will be blocked

fw=block in log quick on pppoe0 all

fw=block out log quick on pppoe0 all

[dhcpd]

; Global dhcp parameters

allow unknown-clients;

ddns-update-style none;

; Parameter for the Subnet

subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 {

range 192.168.1.3 192.168.1.20;

option broadcast-address 192.168.1.255;

option domain-name "company.de";

option domain-name-servers 192.168.1.100;

option routers 192.168.1.2;

option subnet-mask 255.255.255.0;

5 Configuration files

Page 52CELLX 16.2

5.1.13.4 VLAN scenario

In the following example, the system is connected to the IP backbone through emac0. One

Computer is connected to the emac1 interface. You can separate voice and data traffic with

two different VLANs (vlan0 with tag 10 for voice, vlan1 with tag 11 for data). All traffic com-

ing from emac1 will be sent to vlan1. Voice and data will not be mixed.

5.2 Configuration file pabx.cfg

The pabx.cfg file contains system-specific settings and the port configuration. It is divided

into the [System] and [Night<num>] sections.

5.2.1 System settings

The [System] section is divided into several categories to ensure clarity.

Global settings

Log files

Controllers

Subscribers

IP configuration

The following subchapters contain a detailed description of these categories.

5.2.1.1 Global Settings

The entry in this category is responsible for the life-line (bypass) functionality of the PRI port’s

relay when the system is on. When the system is off, both PRI ports are connected to each

other, which means that it provides a transparent connection between the PBX and the PSTN

if the system is installed between the PBX and the PSTN. When the system is on, all routing

algorithms are active.

Bypass=ON/OFF

ON: PRI relay is on (system controls both PRI ports).

Example 5.18 VLAN scenario

[System]

[emac0]

IpAddress=192.168.1.12/16

[emac1]

IpAddress=up

[vlan0]

IfConfig=vlan 10,7 vlanif emac0

IpAddress=10.0.1.2/24

[vlan1]

IfConfig=vlan 11,1 vlanif emac0

IpAddress=172.16.4.5/16

[bridge0]

BrConfig=add vlan1 add emac1 up

5 Configuration files

Page 53CELLX 16.2

OFF: PRI relay is off (both PRI ports are connected to each other, regardless of whether or not

the system is running).

Use the following parameter to configure the system for μ-law coded voice data. Make sure

this parameter is set to Yes if you connect your gateway to a T1 line in the U.S.A: Mulaw=yes.

5.2.1.2 Log files

CDRs, unconnected calls, system events, trace output and statistics can be saved into files.

The following entries are necessary to generate log files:

You can define how the log files are to be divided. There are two possibilities for saving entries

into a new file:

In increments of time (twice-daily, daily, weekly, monthly)

Depending on the size of the file

You can also define a maximum number of up to 35 of the most recent files.

To ensure bypass functionality, make sure this parameter is always set to ON.

Table 5.10 pabx.cfg: log file entries

Entry Description

ActionLog=/data/protocol.log System events

Log=/data/cdr.log CDR entries

failedlog=/data/failed.log Unconnected calls

TraceLog=/data/trace.log System trace

MsgLog=/data/msg.log Incoming SMS and USSD messages

The available internal memory is approximately 8 MB if the does not contain optional memory

expansion. Make sure you monitor the available memory.

5 Configuration files

Page 54CELLX 16.2

A dash (-) appears in place of information that is to be ignored.

In the following entry, the files cdr.log and failed.log are renamed every day or when the

file reaches 180kB, whichever comes first. Up to 7 CDR files will be saved on the system. If

the file size reaches 180kB on one day, the second file will have the same date. Only the run-

ning number will be increased.

In the following entry, the file protocol.log is renamed every day or when the file reaches 60

kB. Up to 21 failed files will be saved on the system.

In the following entry, the file trace.log is renamed every day when the file has reached

600kB. Up to seven log files will be saved on the system.

Table 5.11 pabx.cfg: log parameters

Log=/data/<file.log> <saved> <size> <number>

<file> The name of the log file is generated as follows:

[file]yymmdd[0-9|A-Z].log.

<saved> Refers to the frequency with which the file is saved. The following op-

tions are possible:

halfdaily Every day at 11:59 and 23:59

daily Every day at 23:59

weekly Sunday at 23:59

monthly The last day of the month at 23:59

<size> Regardless of the value entered in <saved>, the file will be saved when

the <file size> has been reached (in kB).

NOTE: We recommend a file size of a multiple of 60kB.

<number> Refers to the number of files that will be saved in the system (between

5 and 35) before the first file is overwritten. This setting is useful not

only for limited file size, but also for files that store events. Normally size

can be limited for these files, for example 5 files of 1MB each. If the fifth

file is full, the first one will automatically be overwritten.

Example 5.19 Log files renamed 1

Log=/data/cdr.log daily 180 7

failedlog=/data/failed.log daily 180 7

Example 5.20 Log files renamed 2

ActionLog=/data/protocol.log daily 60 21

Example 5.21 Log files renamed 3

TraceLog=/data/trace.log daily 600 7

5 Configuration files

Page 55CELLX 16.2

In the following entry, the statistic values are reset daily at 12:00 midnight and saved in the

asr.log.

5.2.1.3 Night configuration

The sections for the time-dependent configuration changes and time-controlled routings are

defined here.

A maximum of 19 additional daily configuration zones are possible (Night1 to Night19). The

entry NightResetTime reactivates the original configuration contained in the System section.

The entry will have the following syntax:

In the following example, the configuration section is activated Fridays, Wednesdays and

Mondays at noon unless the day in question is a holiday.

Example 5.22 Log files statistic values reset

StatisticTime=/data/asr.log 00:00 11111111

Please remember to keep track of how much memory is available on the system.

Table 5.12 pabx.cfg: night parameters

Night<num>=<time> <day>

<num> Enter a value between 1 and 19 to define which

configuration is to be loaded.

<time> If there is a time set with the format hh:mm after

this entry, this configuration is loaded at that

time on the defined day.

<day> Use a bitmask to set the weekdays on which the

configuration applies here. The daymap appears

in the following order: HoSaFrThWeTuMoSu.

Example 5.23 Night configuration 1

Night2=12:00 00101010

5 Configuration files

Page 56CELLX 16.2

In the following example, the configuration section switches back to the default configura-

tion (System section) every day at 8:00 p.m.

Holidays

Up to 50 different dates can be set for night sections used by holiday. The variable dd.mm

sets the day and month in which the night section is activated when the 8th bit is set in the

bitmask (see Table 5.12).

5.2.1.4 Controllers

This category defines the parameters that apply to the ports. The order of the ports is defined

as follows: The CELLX contains integrated Mobile Boards, each of which contain four mobile

modules. Each Mobile Board’s mobile channels are configured as additional controllers. That

means four controllers are configured for each board. Beginning with 0, these controllers are

defined as the first controllers in the section. Next the PRI controllers are defined, followed by

the VoIP controllers. All controllers are defined in ascending order.

Table 5.13 describes the order for additional boards.

Example 5.24 Night configuration 2

NightResetTime=20:00 11111111

Any defined Night sections must be set in the files pabx.cfg and route.cfg. If there are no

changes in these sections, you must copy them from the System section. The complete Sub-

scriber section must appear in the Night section of the pabx.cfg (see Chapter 5.2.5 on

page 68). The active route(s) (MapAll, Restrict and Redirect entries) must appear in the Night

section of the route.cfg (see Chapter 5.3 on page 70).

Table 5.13 Configuration order: controller parameters

Function Number of Controllers

Mobile BoardsUp to 32 (optional)

Base Board (PRI) 2

Base Board (VoIP) Up to 4 (optional)

DTMF (virtual) Up to 1 (optional)

Table 5.14 shows only the maximum number of controllers for each individual interface. Any

possible combinations will depend on the system’s specifications.

5 Configuration files

Page 57CELLX 16.2

The individual ports are defined with the following parameters.

Table 5.14 pabx.cfg: controller parameters

Controller<port>=<address> <type> <mode> <line_type> ADR:<hardware address> IRQ:<in-

terrupt> UNIT:<unit> VALUE:<value>

<port> Defines the running (physical) port number.

<address> Defines the configured (virtual) port address. In the default configuration,

PRI TE ports are 9 and PRI NT ports are 10. VoIP ports are 40.

<type> Defines the connection type:

TES2M PRI external (terminal endpoint)

NTS2M PRI internal (network termination)

VOIP VoIP module

GSM GSM port

CDMA CDMA port

UMTS UMTS port

TE BRI external (if you change from NT to TE or vice versa,

you must change the DIP switches for the respective port

on the 4BRI Board)

NT BRI internal

DTMF virtual controller for activating DTMF tone detection

<mode> Defines the protocol variation for PRI and BRI lines:

DSS1

CASR2 (only for PRI lines)

<line_type> Switches CRC4 mode for PRI lines on or off:

CRC4 CRC4 on

DF double frame: CRC4 off

Additional entry for T1 only:

T1 US Defines this controller as T1. Bear in mind that if one con-

troller is defined as T1, all controllers must be thus de-

fined. If you configure T1, you must also enter

CHMAX[23] in the corresponding Subscriber lines.

T1 EXAMPLE:

MULAW=Yes

Controller00=20 TES2M DSS1 T1 US

Controller01=21 NTS2M DSS1 T1 US

...

Subscriber00 = TRANSPARENT ROUTER CHMAX[23]

Subscriber01 = TRANSPARENT ROUTER CHMAX[23]

ADR:<hardware ad-

dress>

(Optional) Defines the hardware address used for the first controller on an

additional Mobile Board. These entries are preconfigured and cannot be

changed.

IRQ:<interrupt> (Optional) Defines the interrupt used for the first controller on an addi-

tional Mobile Board. These entries are preconfigured and cannot be

changed.

5 Configuration files

Page 58CELLX 16.2

Ports set to the same type can have the same address. In this case they will form a trunk

group. If you change this parameter in the configuration, you must restart the system.

Each Mobile Board contains 4 controllers. The hardware address and the interrupt are defined

behind the first controllers, which are defined in the configuration before the Base Board.

In the following example, the system contains four Mobile Boards. One PRI controller is con-

figured for TE and one for NT. The protocol used is DSS1, and CRC4 is active. One

VoIP Module is attached.

UNIT:<unit> (Optional) Defines the currency for the charges (default EUR). Special

charge generation is possible. Special charge generation is possible for:

France UNIT:&F

Spain UNIT:&SP

Portugal UNIT:&P

Greece UNIT:&G

Switzerland

UNIT:&CH

Netherlands

UNIT:&NL

Italy UNIT:&I

NOTE: The <line_type> must be configured for these entries to

work.

EXAMPLE:

Controller02=10 NT DSS1 PMP UNIT:€ VALUE:0.010

Controller03=10 NT DSS1 PMP UNIT:€ VALUE:0.010

VALUE:<value> (Optional) Defines the charges that accumulate by unit (default 12).

Table 5.14 pabx.cfg: controller parameters (continued)

Controller<port>=<address> <type> <mode> <line_type> ADR:<hardware address> IRQ:<in-

terrupt> UNIT:<unit> VALUE:<value>

Example 5.25 Controller settings 1

Controller00=20 GSM ADR:D800 IRQ:5

Controller01=20 GSM

Controller02=20 GSM

Controller03=20 GSM

Controller04=20 GSM ADR:D900 IRQ:7

Controller05=20 GSM

Controller06=20 GSM

Controller07=20 GSM

Controller08=20 GSM ADR:DA00 IRQ:5

Controller09=20 GSM

Controller10=20 GSM

Controller11=20 GSM

Controller12=20 GSM ADR:DB00 IRQ:7

Controller13=20 GSM

Controller14=20 GSM

Controller15=20 GSM

Controller16=9 TES2M DSS1 US DF

Controller17=10 NTS2M DSS1 US DF

Controller18=40 VoIP

5 Configuration files

Page 59CELLX 16.2

5.2.1.5 Subscribers

Various functions for individual interfaces (ISDN or VOIP) are defined in each controller’s Sub-

scriber line. The order of the subscriber lines is the same as the order of the controller lines

(see Chapter 5.2.1.4 on page 56). Most changes become active following a restart. If it suf-

fices to activate the configuration, this is noted in the parameter description.

Additional parameters for mobile controllers are described in Table 5.16 and Table 5.17. The

parameters listed in Table 5.16 are required for mobile controllers and those listed in Table

5.17 are optional, depending on the implementation scenario.

Table 5.15 pabx.cfg: subscriber parameters

Subscriber<port>=<list>

<port> Refers to the running (physical) port number.

The <list> variable may contain one or more of the following keywords:

DEFAULT The standard configuration will be used. No other parameters in this

table are set.

TRANSPARENT Only the number is sent as caller ID (without the virtual port address).

Activate configuration suffices to activate changes. If TRANSPARENT

is not set, the address of the incoming port is added to the A party

number as a prefix.

CASR2[<name>] Activates the profile defined in the corresponding [CASR2] section.

ALARM Activates the monitoring mode for the respective port. If a relevant

error occurs at the port, the error is written in the protocol.log file.

Depending on the configuration, a remote connection to the number

defined for AlarmCallback is established and/or an SNMP trap is gen-

erated. Activate configuration suffices to activate changes.

SWITCH Changes internal port handling. In the default configuration, the VoIP

controller is set to NT. You can use this parameter to change it from

NT to TE. Restart the system to activate the changes.

CHMAX[xx] Defines the number of channels per controller, for example 5 for the

virtual DTMF controller. A maximum of five concurrent channels are

possible for DTMF detection.

CHSTART[xx]

CHSTART[xx,<mode>]

Defines the channel where the search for availabe B-channels for out-

going calls starts. Three optional modes are possible for the mode of

search: CYC, LIN, INV:

CYC A round-robin search for the next free B channel oc-

curs. The first call receives the first B channel, the

second call the second B channel and so on. When

the respective B channel is occupied, then the next

one is selected.

LIN The search for the next free B channel occurs linear-

ly. The search always begins at the specified B chan-

nel. When that B channel is busy, the next one is

selected until a free B channel is found.

INV The search for the next free B channel occurs in-

versely and always begins at the specified B channel.

When that B channel is busy, the previous one is se-

lected.

DTMF[<sec>,/<dir>/

<file>]

Please refer to Chapter 11.2.1 Announcements.

5 Configuration files

Page 60CELLX 16.2

Required mobile parameters

Specific settings for each mobile interface appear in square brackets behind the keywords

GSM, UMTS or CDMA. These parameters are separated with a comma.

Example 5.26 Subscriber settings 1

Subscriber00=TRANSPARENT ROUTER ALARM

Subscriber01=TRANSPARENT ROUTER ALARM

Subscriber02=TRANSPARENT ROUTER SWITCH CHMAX[16] ALARM

Table 5.16 Required mobile parameters in pabx.cfg

Subscriber<port>=<type>

[<pin>,<lain>,<SMSC>,<sim>,<loudGSM>,<loudPCM>,SIM<x>,...]

<port> Refers to the running (physical) port number.

<type> Enter GSM, CDMA or UMTS depending on your hardware configuration.

<pin> Defines the SIM card’s PIN. The PIN is always four digits. If no PIN is defined for

a SIM card, the PIN 0000 must be used.

NOTE: An error message appears in the protocol.log file when a PIN is

incorrectly configured.

<lain> Defines the LAIN (Local Area Identification Number) – the mobile network to

be used. The LAIN consists of the MCC (Mobile Country Code) and the MNC

(Mobile Network Code). Setting this parameter prevents roaming into another

mobile network. If the LAIN is set at 00000, roaming will not be prevented. The

LAIN configuration prevents accidental logon of the SIM card with another net-

work and the use of false SIM cards.

<SMSC> Defines the SMS center’s access number. The number must always begin with

+ and the country code.

<SIM> Defines the SIM card to be used. You can enter the values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (op-

tional when using the 24 SIM card carrier). Default 1. Do not change the de-

fault entry if your gateway is equipped with SIM4 carriers . Activate

configuration suffices to activate changes.

NOTE: Please see the example following Table 5.17 for information on

numbering SIM cards.

<loudGSM> Defines the volume level for the mobile line. The values 0 to 3 are possible. 0 is

loudest and 3 is the least loud.

Activating echo cancellation (for GSM modules only):

Depending on the base station (BTS) one of three algorithms will work for this

feature. The algorithms must be tested during activation to determine which

one fits the base station type.

The following values are added to the volume setting:

- 16 -> algorithm 1

- 32 -> algorithm 3

- 48 -> algorithm 6

EXAMPLE 1: If the volume level is set at 1, and algorithm 1 is used for echo can-

cellation, the configuration for <loudGSM> is 17:

Subscriber00=… GSM[0000,00000,+000000,1,17,1,SIM4] …

EXAMPLE 2: If the volume level is set at 2, and algorithm 6 is used for echo can-

cellation, the configuration for <loudGSM> is 50:

Subscriber00=… GSM[0000,00000,+000000,1,50,1,SIM4] …

5 Configuration files

Page 61CELLX 16.2

Optional mobile parameters

In addition to the usual parameters, you can enter the following optional mobile parameters.

Separate each parameter with a comma.

<loudPCM> Defines the volume level to the fixed network. The values 0 to 7 are possible. 7

is loudest and 0 is the least loud.

SIM4 Indicates that the gateway is equipped with SIM4 carriers.

Table 5.16 Required mobile parameters in pabx.cfg (continued)

Subscriber<port>=<type>

[<pin>,<lain>,<SMSC>,<sim>,<loudGSM>,<loudPCM>,SIM<x>,...]

Table 5.17 Optional mobile parameters in pabx.cfg

Parameter Description

BAND(<int>) Defines the GSM frequency band and (<int>) can have the following values:

1 = Mono-band mode 850MHz (Q24CL001 modules only)

2 = Mono-band mode 900MHz (Q24CL001 modules only)

3 = Mono-band mode 1800MHz (Q24CL001 modules only)

4 = Mono-band mode 1900MHz (Q24CL001 modules only)

5 = Dual-band mode 850/1900MHz (Q24CL001 and GE864-QUAD modules)

6 = Dual-band mode 900/1800MHz (Q24CL001 and GE864-QUAD modules)

7 = Dual-band mode 900/1900MHz (Q24CL001 and GE864-QUAD modules)

8 = Dual-band mode 850/1800MHz (GE864-QUAD modules only)

After changing the band settings, you must restart the system to activate the

changes.

NOTE: The BAND parameter can only be used with quad-band GSM

module-type Q24CL001. These quad-band GSM modules are avail-

able as of hardware revision 1.61 (May, 2007). There is no default

band setting! If there is no BAND configuration in the pabx.cfg when

the system is started, the last band stored on the module will be used.

This can cause the system to attempt to register the SIM with the

wrong GSM band.

BNDS<int> For UMTS Boards with module type UC864-G only:

Selects the UMTS or GSM or auto network

0 = auto (default)

1 = GSM

2 = UMTS

BNDU(<int>) For UMTS Boards with module type UC864-G only:

Configures BAND selection in the UMTS network

0 = 850/1900/2100 MHz (default)

1 = 850 MHz

2 = 1900 MHz

3 = 2100 MHz

5 Configuration files

Page 62CELLX 16.2

5.2.1.6 Global settings

This category contains the following system parameters:

For a detailed description of the configuration of the Mobile Board, including the keywords

CHADDR, NEXT, LIMIT and CONTINUE, please refer to Chapter 7 Mobile configuration options.

Table 5.18 pabx.cfg: global settings

System Parameters

VoipGlobalMaxChan=<count>

Max. number of VoIP channels for the entire system.

VoipMaxChanOut=<count>

Limits outgoing calls through this profile. You have to define the number of VoIP channels to be

used.

VoipSuppressRtcp=<mode>

Suppresses (Yes) or allows (No) the sending of RTCP packets.

VoipAnnounce=<filename>,NOCONN

Only for outgoing calls which are sent through the VoIP profile where this parameter is included.

VoipAnnounce defines an audio file which is played to the caller. The entire file is played, even if

the called person picks up the call before the end of the announcement. In the default setting, a

connect is sent to the caller straight away so that the caller can hear the announcement.

Set the option NOCONN to suppress this connect.

VoipStopAnnounceOnConnect=<mode>

If Yes is set and the call changes to the state CONNECTED, the announcement configured with

VoipAnnounce is stopped.

VoipStopAnnounceOnAlert=<mode>

If Yes is set and the call changes to the state ALERTING, the announcement configured with

VoipAnnounce is stopped.

VoipFaxVolume=<volume>

Defines the volume of fax and CID tones.

Range: 0 (-21 dB) to 15 (-6 dB)

Default: 9 (-12 db)

VoipCEDTransferMode=<int>

Defines whether CED (a tone initially sent by a fax device) is sent via T.38 or RTP:

0 = T.38 (default)

1 = RTP

VoipCngRelayEnable=<int>

Defines whether CNG (a tone initially sent by a fax device) is transmitted by means of T.38 or RTP:

0 = RTP (default)

1 = T.38

VoipSendUpdate=<mode>

Allows (Yes) sending of UPDATE messages or not (No). Yes is the default value.

VoipRtpPort=<port>

Defines the starting UDP port used to transmit RTP and RTCP packets (default 29000).

VoipRtpPortSpacing=<count>

Defines the space between the ports used for individual RTP streams (default 2). Minimum value

is 2 (default). Each connection requires two ports (one for RTP and one for RTCP).

5 Configuration files

Page 63CELLX 16.2

H225Port=<port>

Endpoint-to-endpoint port (default 1720).

SipPort=<port>

SIP signaling port (default 5060). A different port for sending can be set in the route.cfg’s VoIP

profile. Otherwise the port set here will be used for sending and receiving.

VoipMaximumBandwidth=<int>

Defines an upper limit for available bandwidth for the VoIP profiles to be configured (see Voip-

BandwidthRestriction in Table 9.6) if traffic shaping is active for the corresponding VoIP profile.

Individual codecs are assigned the following values in kBit/s:

g711a, f711u, trp: 8

g72632, t38: 4

g72624 3

g72616, gsm 2

Other 1

You must define the list of codecs to be used in the VoIP profiles, whereby the codec with the

highest priority must be defined first. Calls will be set up using the codec with the highest priority

as long as the sum of the values for individual calls remains lower than defined here. If the sum

is greater, the next call will be set up with, and existing calls will be switched to, a higher com-

pression rate. Bear in mind that the VoIP peer must support this feature.

VoipStrictRfc3261=<mode>

If yes is set, the SIP transaction/dialog matching will occur strictly as per RFC3261. You must dis-

able this feature for peers that use RFC2543 (from and to name). Default is yes.

VoipLinger=<sec>

After an H.323 release complete has been sent, the TCP session will remain open for the number

of seconds entered if there is no response from TCP message sent so that the system can resend

the TCP packet.

StunServerAddress=<ip addr>

When this parameter is active, the CELLX looks for a (NAT) firewall in the network and figures out

how to bypass it without requiring changes. All ports for signaling, RTP and RTCP are checked.

The parameter VoipGlobalMaxChan defines the number of ports for RTP and RTCP.

NOTE: This is not a solution for all firewall types.

StunServerPollInterval=<sec>

Interval (in seconds) for the stun request at each port (default 600).

Radius=<mode>

On (default) activates the Radius service. If you change Off to On, you must restart the system.

RadiusAuthPort=<num>

Port used for Radius authentication (default 1812).

RadiusAcctPort=<num>

Port used for Radius accounting (default 1813).

NameServer=<ip addr>

IP-address configuration for the DNS server. Enter your network or ISP’s DNS server. If you don’t

know it, you can also enter another DNS server. If you have more than one address, enter this

parameter up to three times on different lines.

Timezone=<continent/city>

Defines the time difference between the CELLX’s time zone and time zone 0 (Greenwich Mean

Time). Enter the continent and a large city (usually the capital) in the time zone.

Table 5.18 pabx.cfg: global settings (continued)

System Parameters

5 Configuration files

Page 64CELLX 16.2

NtpServer=<ip addr>

Sets the SNTP server’s IP address for standard-time queries. The query occurs every four hours.

NOTE: If your system is not attached to an NTP server, you can enter the following config-

uration to retrieve the time from an ISDN TE port:

Subscriber=...TIME

Clockmaster=<type>

Enter S0 to take the system clock from the BRI port if the system has an additional BRI board and

special firmware installed on which at least one controller is connected to the PSTN in TE mode.

This parameter only makes sense if the system does not have a PRI port connected to the PSTN.

S2MLongHaul=<mode>

This option increases the sensitivity on PRI receiving side to support Long Haul applications. The

default value is No (Short Haul).

MoipPort=<port>

Defines the GATE Manager access port (default 4445).

FtpdPort=<port>

Defines the FTP access port (default 21).

TelnetdPort=<port>

Defines the TELNET access port (default 23).

TftpdPort=<port>

Defines the TFTP access port (default 69).

Ftpd=<mode>

Activates (on) or deactivates (off) FTP access. Default on.

Telnetd=<mode>

Activates (on) or deactivates (off) TELNET access. Default on.

Tftpd=<mode>

Activates (on) or deactivates (off) TFTP access. Default off.

RemotePassword=<password>

Defines the password for FTP and GATE Manager access. Please refer to Chapter 4.10.4 on

page 34 for instructions on how to enter an encrypted password in the pabx.cfg. If you do not

define a password, access to the system via GATE Manager occurs without a password, and FTP

access occurs with the default password tcs-ag.

DialTone=<country>

If the system is used in a corporate settings and attached through a PBX to the PSTN, it may be

necessary to generate the carrier’s dial tone. It depends on whether the system sends the dialed

digits to the PSTN or whether it waits for a routing entry to take the call.

The following values can be entered: GE, DE, IR, UK, US, FR, IT

Example 5.27 Global settings

VoipGlobalMaxChan=60

H225Port=1720

SipPort=5060

VoipRtpPort=29000

VoipRtpPortSpacing=2

NameServer=192.168.0.254

Timezone=Europe/Berlin

NtpServer=192.168.0.254

DialTone=GE

Table 5.18 pabx.cfg: global settings (continued)

System Parameters

5 Configuration files

Page 65CELLX 16.2

5.2.2 SMTP-client configuration

The following entries in the pabx.cfg’s [Mail] section are used to send e-mail messages from

the CELLX. The connection to the SMTP server can be used to send CDR files, incoming SMS

to an e-mail account or alarm messages.

The following features are possible:

Sending SMS via e-mail

Receiving SMS in an e-mail, SMS or in a file

Sending and receiving USSD text messages

Displaying incoming calls via e-mail

Setting up connections using e-mail

Sending automatic SMS for unconnected calls

Sending CDRs via e-mail

Sending alarm messages via e-mail

There is no internal time generation for the system when the power is interrupted. That means

the default time is used when the system is restarted or rebooted! Therefore it is important to

set the system time with an NTP server.

Alternatively, if the system is connected via BRI or PRI, a clock may come from the network

connected to the corresponding port. Enter TIME in the pabx.cfg’s subscriber line of the

TE port and then activate the configuration to activate this clock.

You must restart the system after making changes to activate the settings.

Table 5.19 SMTP client configuration

SMTP parameters

SmtpServer=<ip addr>

In <ip addr>, enter the IP address of the destination SMTP server that is to receive the e-mail

messages.

MailUserIn=<username>

Enter a username for incoming e-mail authentication.

MailUserOut=<username>

Enter a username for outgoing e-mail authentication.

MailPwdIn=<password>

Enter a password for incoming e-mail authentication.

MailPwdOut=<password>

Enter a password for outgoing e-mail authentication.

MailPortIn=<num>

Enter a TCP port for incoming email (default 25).

MailPortOut=<num>

Enter a TCP port for outgoing email (default 25).

MailAuthEncr=<type>

Enter an encryption method for e-mail authentication (default base64).

5 Configuration files

Page 66CELLX 16.2

Sending alarm messages via e-mail

With the appropriate configuration, you can send e-mails containing alarm messages that are

written into the log file. The sender is given as alarm and the system’s name appears in the

subject box. The text box contains the alarm message.

MailRcpt=<domain>

In <domain>, enter the destination domain, the destination address and an @ sign. If the desti-

nation address is already complete (with an @ sign), <domain> is not added.

MailFrom=<URL>

Enter here the URL that will be sent in the e-mail’s FROM field in the following possible formats:

MailFrom=domain to send OAD@domain (or user@domain, if no OAD available).

MailFrom=ipaddress to send OAD@ipaddress (or user@ipaddress, if no OAD available).

MailFrom=123@ to send 123@<IP address of gateway>.

MailFrom=123@teles.de to send 123@teles.de.

MailFrom=123@ipaddress to send 123@ipaddress.

MailRcvMax=<count>

Maximum number of incoming e-mails queued for transmission via SMS or USSD.

MailRcptMax=<count>

Number of "RCPT TO" entries in e-mails that come from the LAN (a message is sent to the LCR

for each "RCPT TO" entry in each incoming e-mail).

MaxMailsToHost=<count>

Maximum number of e-mail messages sent to the LCR simultaneously. Default 4

MailToHostRetries=<count>

Number of retries when SMS transmission is not successful. When the limit entered is reached,

an error message is sent to the e-mail sender (default 3).

MailSendRetries=<count>

Number of times an attempt is made to send an e-mail. Default 10.

MailMaxIncomingClients=<count>

Defines the maximum number of clients that can access the system simultaneously. If 0 is entered,

the SMTP port (25) will be blocked for incoming sessions. Default 100.

MailTcpRcvTimeout=<sec>

Defines the number of seconds after which a session will be terminated following a possible re-

ceiving error in the data stream. Default 0 (immediately).

MailTcpSndTimeout=<sec>

Defines the number of seconds after which a session will be terminated following a possible

transmission error in the data stream. Default 0 (immediately).

MailAllowedPeers=<ip addr>

Defines IP addresses from which incoming SMTP connections will be accepted. Separate IP ad-

dresses with a space. If a dash (-) is entered, the SMTP port (25) will be blocked for incoming ses-

sions. If this parameter is left empty (default), incoming connections will be accepted from all IP

addresses.

MailPropPort=<num>

Enter the port number for a TELES proprietary mail protocol.

Table 5.19 SMTP client configuration (continued)

SMTP parameters

5 Configuration files

Page 67CELLX 16.2

The following entry in the configuration file activates this function.

5.2.3 Number portability settings

The [NumberPortability] section includes the parameters necessary for communication with

the database server. For a description of the functionality and configuration of this feature,

please see Chapter 11.5 Ported number screening

Example 5.28 Sending alarm messages via e-mai

...

ActionLog=/data/protocol.log daily 1000 5 @<e-mail account>

...

You must restart the system after making changes to activate the settings.

Table 5.20 Number portability settings

Number portability parameters

MNPQAddress=<ip addr>

For iMNP or direct queries to Enquire: Enter the IP address to which the number portability query

is to be sent.

MNPQPort=<port>

For iMNP or direct queries to Enquire: Enter the tcp port to which the number portability query is

to be sent.

MNPQAddress2=<ip addr>

For iMNP or direct queries to Enquire: Enter the IP address to which the second number portability

query is to be sent when ! appears in the mapping entry. A second database will then be queried,

for example if the first one is not online.

MNPQPort2=<port>

For iMNP or direct queries to Enquire: Enter the tcp port to which the second number portability

query is to be sent.

MNPQSum=<mode>

For iMNP: This parameter must be activated (Yes) if an iMNP is used.

E2EMRSAddress=<ip addr>

For direct queries to End2End: Enter the IP address to which the number portability query is to be

sent.

E2EMRSPort=<port>

For direct queries to End2End: Enter the udp port to which the number portability query is to be

sent.

5 Configuration files

Page 68CELLX 16.2

5.2.4 SNMP settings

The Simple Network Management Protocol facilitates network management and monitoring

of CELLX network devices and their functions. For a detailed description of SNMP configura-

tion, please refer to Chapter 10.4 SNMP agent.

5.2.5 Time-controlled configuration settings

The [Night<num>] section is reserved for prospective time-controlled configuration changes.

In the pabx.cfg file, the Night sections contain all of the system’s Subscriber entries.

5.2.6 .CASR2 settings

If you are working with Channel Associated Signaling, you must activate a CAS profile in the

relevant Controller and Subscriber entries and define a profile for each Subscriber en-

try in a separate [CASR2:<name>] section.

Generally you will need to set only the country code 55 for Brazil. The default country code

is 0, which sets the ITU-T standard.

You must restart the system after making changes to activate the settings.

Table 5.21 CASR2 settings

CAS profile parameters

CountryCode=<num>

Defines set of pre-configured R2 parameters according to the E.164 country code (for Brazil 55,

etc.) When not defined or set at 0, the ITU-T standard set of parameters will be used. Default 0.

CDbit=<int>

Specifies the default setting of the C and D bits when the port transmits line signals. The default

setting for C is 0 and for D is 1. Generally they will not need to be changed.

Iabcd=<int>

Specifies whether any of the A B C or D bits are inverted. Default is 0. Generally it will not need

to be changed.

BlockBeforeIdle=<int>

Set to 1 when backward blocking is required (before going to idle) after the clear forward has

been received (default 0).

AnsTone=<int>

Defines the Group A tone used to respond to incoming calls and switch to Group B tones (default

3).

ANIReqCatTone=<int>

Defines the group A tone used to request the calling-party category before the ANI digits. The

default value is 5 or 6, depending on the country code.

ANIReqAniTone=<int>

Defines the Group A tone used to request the next ANI digit. The default value is 1, 2, 4, 5 or 9,

depending on the country code.

5 Configuration files

Page 69CELLX 16.2

RepeatBeginning=<int>

Defines the group A tone used to restart sending the DNIS from the first digit. The default value

is 0, 2, 9 or 10, depending on the country code.

SendMinus1=<int>

Defines the Group A tone used to request repetition of the last DNIS digit. The default value is 0,

2, 8 or 9, depending on the country code.

SendMinus2=<int>

Group A tone used to request repetition of the second to the last DNIS digit. The default value is

0, 7 or 9, depending on the country code.

SendMinus3=<int>

Group A tone used to request repetition of the third to the last DNIS digit. The default value is 0

or 8, depending on the country code.

GrBIdlTone=<int>

Defines the Group B signal to indicate that the called line is available and charges will be tabulated

if the called party answers. Default 1, 6 or 5, depending on the country code.

GrBIdlNoChargeTone=<int>

Defines the Group B signal to indicate that the called line is available and charges will not be tab-

ulated if the called party answers.

GrBBusyTone=<int>

Defines the Group B busy signal, which specifies the Group B backward tone to be sent by the

incoming R2 register to indicate the busy condition.

GrBCongTone=<int>

Defines the Group B congestion tone, which specifies the Group B backward tone to be sent by

the incoming R2 register to indicate the congestion condition (default 4).

GrBOutOfOrdTone=<int>

Defines the Group B line out of order tone, which specifies the Group B backward tone to be sent

by the incoming R2 register to indicate that the line is out of order (default 8).

GrBUnallocNumbTone=<int>

Defines the Group B unallocated number tone, which specifies the Group B backward tone to be

sent by the incoming R2 register to indicate that the called number does not exist.

EndDIDTone=<int>

Defines the Group I tone that indicates the end of the DID. When 0 is set, this tone will not be

used and T3 timeout and A-3 pulse from the incoming side will indicate the end of the DID.

ANICallingCat=<int>

Defines the index of possible categories for the country that defines the Group II tone.

ANIRequest=<int>

Specifies whether or not ANI is requested. When 0 is set, AniMaxRxDigits is automatically reset

to 0 (default 1).

AniMaxRxDigits=<int>

Defines the maximum number of ANI digits for incoming calls (default 32).

DnisMaxRxDigits=<int>

Defines the maximum numberof DNIS digits for incoming telephony calls. It is important to set

this parameter accurately for national variants that do not handle variable-length dialed digit

strings well. For other variants, a large number can be used.

GetAniAfterDnis=<int>

Enter 0 to get the ANI after the first DNIS digit. Enter 1 to get the ANI digits after the DNIS is

complete.

Table 5.21 CASR2 settings (continued)

CAS profile parameters

5 Configuration files

Page 70CELLX 16.2

5.3 Configuration file route.cfg

The system’s routing information is saved in the route.cfg. The file contains the following

sections:

5.3.1 Entries in the [System] section

The[System]section contains the following entries.

5.3.1.1 Restrict

Restrict entries are used to handle calls in a mapping based on the controller / controller

group where the calls originate. A Restrict entry can be used, for instance, to route all calls

coming from PSTN directly to the PBX. If no called party number (DAD) is transmitted, Re-

strict can also be used to make the call mappable, for instance for calls coming from GSM.

Example 5.29 CASR2 settings

Controller00=9 TES2M CASR2

...

Subscriber00 = TRANSPARENT ROUTER CASR2[BRAZIL1] ALARM

Subscriber01 = TRANSPARENT ROUTER CASR2[BRAZIL2] ALARM

...

[CASR2:BRAZIL1]

CountryCode=55

[CASR2:BRAZIL2]

CountryCode=55

You must restart the system after making changes to activate the settings.

Table 5.22 Sections in the route.cfg file

Section Function

[System] Contains all routing entries (MapAll, Restrict, Redirect) that are to be active

when the default configuration is used.

[Night<num>] Contains all routing entries (MapAll, Restrict, Redirect), and VoIP, gate-

keeper and registrar profiles that are to be active with the defined time

configuration. Bear in mind that you must also copy all routing and profile

settings that may already appear in the das System section or in the indi-

vidual profile sections, even if they do not change!

[VoIP:<name>] Contains all settings necessary for communication with the VoIP peer.

[GateKeeper:<name>] Contains all settings for the gatekeeper. This profile is then assigned to the

VoIP profiles.

[Registrar:<name>] Contains all settings to register with the registrar.

5 Configuration files

Page 71CELLX 16.2

The Restrict parameter adds a prefix to a DAD before the DAD is mapped. Restrict pa-

rameters are always handled before the MapAll parameters and always require a matching

MapAll parameter.

The left side of the equals sign in the Restrict parameter contains the controller number

plus an optional trunk number or a specific calling number (OAD). The special symbol ? may

be used as a wildcard to represent any character. The right side contains the prefix that is to

be put in front of the DAD and an optional service indicator.

In the route.cfg, the list of Restrict parameters is searched from bottom to top for a

matching controller plus optional trunk number / OAD. Because the search is done bottom

up, place the more specific Restrict entries below the more general ones. Once a match

has been found, the DAD is prefixed with the contents of the <pl> variable. Then the call is

mapped.

Table 5.23 route.cfg: restrict parameters

Restrict<ns>[R][T]=<pl> <sin>

Parameter Description No. Digits Optional

<ns> Contains the controller number plus an optional

trunk number or a specific calling number (OAD).

The special symbol ? may be used as a wildcard to

represent any character.

[R] For calls that are redirected with Redirect3, the

original OAD can be changed again using

RestrictR. Only in combination with service indica-

tor 15.

[T] For calls that are redirected with Redirect2, the

original OAD can be changed again using

RestrictT. Only in combination with service indica-

tor 15.

<pl> Stands for a virtual placeholder. The DAD is prefixed

with the contents of this variable.

<sin> The service indicator variable sin restricts the com-

mand to a service. Without a sin, the Restrict com-

mand is valid for all services.

Possible service indicator values are:

00 All services

01 Telephony

02 Analog services

03 X.21-services

04 Telefax group 4

05 64 kbps videotext or TELES-specific

SMS services

06 TELES-specific USSD services

07 Data transfer 64 kbps

08 X.25-services

09 Teletext 64

10 Mixed mode

15 Used internally for calling-party

(OAD) manipulation.

16 Video telephone

5 Configuration files

Page 72CELLX 16.2

All calls from PRI controller 9 (PSTN) are sent to PRI controller 10 (PBX). First, the Restrict com-

mand adds the prefix “pl” to the DAD of the received call for all calls coming from PSTN. Then

the call is mapped. In the mapping, everything that is prefixed with “pl” is sent to controller

10 by removing the prefix and adding the controller to the number.

Calls from mobile controllers with the LAIN 26212 are sent to PRI controller 10 (PBX), exten-

sion 0. This is imperative because the caller cannot dial an extension directly with mobile.

For a detailed description, please see Chapter 7.2 Incoming voice calls from mobile.

5.3.1.2 MapAll

Mapping entries are necessary for routing calls. The prefix or telephone number (DAD) for

which the mapping applies is searched and the call routed according to the matching map-

ping entry.

Mapping entries begin with the keyword MapAll. They work as follows: anything on the left

of the equals sign is removed from the prefix / telephone number (DAD) that has come in and

replaced with what is on the right of the equals sign.

If, for example, the incoming DAD is 12345678 with 123456 being the trunk number and 78

the extension, MapAll123456=9123456 means that 123456 is cut off the number and

9123456 is added to it. The called number is 912345678 with 9 being the port.

MapAll123456=9 means that 123456 is cut off and 9 added. The called number is 978 with

9 being the port.

Example 5.30 Restrict 1

Restrict9=pl

MapAllpl=10

Example 5.31 Restrict 2

Restrict26212=100

5 Configuration files

Page 73CELLX 16.2

Mappings are searched from top to bottom. Place the more specific entries above the more

general ones.

All mobile calls with the prefix 01555 are transmitted to the mobile controllers (20). All in-

ternational calls are sent to the VoIP carrier (40) with the profile name DF. All national calls

are sent to the PRI controller with the number 9. It is important that the mapping for interna-

tional calls is placed above the mapping for national calls. If you change the order of both

mappings, international calls would be sent to controller 9 instead of 40.

If CHADDR appears in the mobile port’s Subscriber lines, the entry will look like this:

MapAll<num>=<lain><num>

All calls with the prefixes 01555 and 01556 are sent to the mobile controllers with the LAIN

26212. All calls with the prefixes 01444 and 01445 are sent to the mobile controllers with

the LAIN 26213. Digit collection is activated.

Table 5.24 route.cfg: map parameters

MapAll<direct>=<num> <mode>

Parameter Description No. Digits Optional

<direct> Defines the prefix or telephone number for which the

entry applies.

<num> Defines the routing for a call in the order given:

Destination port’s controller number

Optional VoIP profile name followed by a colon if

the call is terminated via VoIP

Optional prefix

Part of the number on the left that is transmitted

The special symbol ? may be used as a wildcard to

represent any character.

The special symbol . may be used as a wildcard to

represent any digit.

<mode> VOICE Applies for calls with the service in-

dicator voice (default).

DATA Applies for calls with the service in-

dicator data.

4 or 5 X

Example 5.32 MapAll 1

MapAll01555=|2001555<<14

MapAll00=40DF:00

MapAll0=90

Example 5.33 MapAll 2

MapAll01555=|2621201555<<17

MapAll01556=|2621201556<<17

MapAll01444=|2621301444<<17

MapAll01445=|2621301445<<17

5 Configuration files

Page 74CELLX 16.2

5.3.1.3 Redirect

This entry facilitates alternative routing when the first destination cannot be reached or is

busy. A placeholder appears to the right of the equal sign. The routing entry (MapAll) can be

defined for the redirect using the placeholder entered.

Make sure that the numbers for the carriers are routed to the correct ports! For detailed in-

formation on digit collection and enblock/overlap receiving, please see Chapter 8.4 Digit col-

lection (enblock/overlap receiving).

Table 5.25 route.cfg: redirect parameters

Redirect<type><num>=<redirect> <sin> <time>

Parameter Description No. Digits Optional

<type> Enter 2 or 3 to set the following types:

2call forwarding no answer

3call forwarding when busy

<num> Defines the number for which calls will be redirected. 59

<redirect> Defines the placeholder used in the two-target routing

entry and the number to which calls to <x> will be redi-

rected.

<sin> The service indicator variable sin restricts the command

to a service. Without a sin, the Redirect command is val-

id for all services.

Possible service indicator values are:

01 Telephony

02 Analog services

03 X.21-services

04 Telefax group 4

05 Videotext (64 kbps)

07 Data transfer 64 kbps

08 X.25-services

09 Teletext 64

10 Mixed mode

15 Videotext (new standard)

16 Video telephone

NOTE: Fax forwarding must be set for analog and

telephony services because incoming fax calls

from the analog network may arrive with either

telephony or analog service indicators.

2(X)

(Only op-

tional if

<time> is

not set. If

<time> is

set and

<sin> is

not need-

ed please

select 00

for sin.)

<time> For type 2 redirect entries, a timer (in seconds) can be

defined after the service indicator entry.

255 X

5 Configuration files

Page 75CELLX 16.2

In the following example, all mobile calls with the prefix 01555 are transmitted to the mobile

carrier with the LAIN 26212. Digit collection is activated. If the carrier cannot be reached or

is busy, the redirect command activates the second target mapping with the placeholder A

and the call is automatically sent to PRI controller 9.

In the following example, calls to 26212 that remain unanswered for 12 seconds and calls to

26213 that remain unanswered for 20 seconds are redirected through the PRI port.

Excluding busy calls or specific cause values from redirect

Defines a hexadecimal cause value according to DSS1. When connections to the destination

are rejected because of the reason defined by the cause value, the CELLX sends a busy signal

to the attached PBX. Alternative routing is not carried out.

To avoid second-choice routings when the called-party number is busy, set the following pa-

rameter in the first-choice port’s Subscriber line in the pabx.cfg:

BUSY[<cause>]

Defines a hexadecimal cause value according to DSS1. When connections to the destination

are rejected because of the reason defined by the cause value, the CELLX sends a busy signal

to the attached PBX. Alternative routing is not carried out. You can also define a range of

consecutive cause values:

BUSY[<cause>,<cause>]

An exclamation point (!) in front of a cause value means all cause values except the one listed.

For example, BUSY[!95], means all cause values except 95 will be rejected with a busy signal.

In the following example, all outgoing calls over controller 04 are rejected with the cause val-

ue 91 when the called party is busy. Alternative routing is not carried out.

5.3.1.4 Setting the time-controlled sections

If you use a time-configured route on the system, please see Chapter 5.2.1.3 for a definition

of individual configuration zones. The active route is configured in the route.cfg file.

Example 5.34 Redirect 1

MapAll01555=|2621201555<<17

Redirect326212=A

MapAllA=9

Example 5.35 Redirect 2

MapAll01555=|2621201555<<17

MapAll01556=|2621301556<<17

Redirect226212=A 01 12

Redirect226213=A 01 20

MapAllA=9

Example 5.36 Called party is busy

Subscriber04=....BUSY[91]

5 Configuration files

Page 76CELLX 16.2

The following example contains three sections ([System], [Night1] and [Night2]), in which the

route changes. All international calls are sent to the VoIP carrier DF in the default configura-

tion. Digit collection is actived. In the time span for [Night1], these international calls are rout-

ed to VoIP carrier Ni, and in the time span for [Night2] they are routed through the PRI

controller to the carrier with the prefix 010xx. National calls are always sent to VoIP carrier DF

and local calls are routed to the outside line.

5.3.2 VoIP profiles

This section includes all of the most important parameters for communication with the VoIP

peer.

Basic parameters

Example 5.37 Setting the time-controlled sections

[System]

MapAll00=|40DF:00<<24

MapAll0=|40DF:0<<24

MapAll?=9?

[Night1]

MapAll00=|40Ni:00<<24

MapAll0=|40DF:0<<24

MapAll?=9?

[Night2]

MapAll00=9010xx00

MapAll0=|40DF:0<<24

MapAll?=9?

Any defined Night configurations must be set in the files pabx.cfg and route.cfg. If there

are no changes in these sections, you must copy them from the System section. The complete

Subscriber section must appear in the Night section of the pabx.cfg (see Chapter 5.2.5 on

page 68). The active route must appear in the route.cfg (see Chapter 5.3 on page 70).

Table 5.26 route.cfg: VoIP basic parameters

VoIP Basic Parameters

[Voip:<name>]

Name of the routing profile. The name must begin with a letter. Use a short and meaningful

name.

VoipDirection=<mode>

Defines the direction in which VoIP calls can be set up. Possible options: In, Out, IO, None).

VoipPeerAddress=<ip addr> or <name>

The peer’s IP address or name. Default is 0 (if it is not set, please set the parameter VoipIpMask

to 0x00000000).

VoipIpMask=<ip mask>

The subnetmask is used to determine the size of the IP address range for incoming traffic. The

syntax is 0x followed by the mask in hexadecimal notation. Example of a Class C mask entry:

0xffffff00. Default is 0xffffffff (only incoming traffic is accepted from the defined peer address).

5 Configuration files

Page 77CELLX 16.2

VoipSignalling=<int>

Determines the profile’s signaling protocol for outgoing VoIP calls. In the case of incoming calls,

auto detection ensures that each call from the peer is accepted, regardless of the protocol:

0=H.323 (default), 1=SIP udp, 2=SIP tcp, 3=tls.

NOTE: TLS requires the following additional software: crypto.vnd and the key files key.pem

and cert.pem.

VoipCompression=<list>

The compression to be used, in order of preference. At least one matching codec with the peer

must be defined.

Voice:

g729, g729a, g729b, g729ab

These codecs have a bit rate of 8 kbit/s (compression ratio 1:8). A stands for annex

a and b for annex b.

g72616, g72624, g72632, g72640

These ADPCM codecs have various bit rates: g72616 = 16kBit/s (compression ratio

1:4), g72624 = 24kBit/s, g72632 = 32kBit/s (compression ratio 1:2), g72640 =

40kBit/s.

NOTE: G726 32kBit/s can also be signaled as G.721 by using the entry g721.

g728

The Codec has a bit rate of 16kBit/s (compression ratio 1:4).

g711a, g711u

These PCM codecs have a bit rate of 64kBit/s. No voice compression occurs. a stands

for a-law and u for μ-law.

g723, g723L

These codecs work with 30ms data frames. g723.1 uses a bit rate of 6.3 kbit/s, and

g723L uses a bit rate of 5.3 kbit/s to send RTP packets.

NOTE: This has no influence on the compression ratio of incoming RTP packets. Both sides

must be able to receive both ratios.

gsm

GSM-FR (full rate) has a bit rate of 13 kbit/s.

The following codecs are also possible: g721 (SIP only)

Fax: t38

T.38 (fax over IP) allows the transfer of fax documents in real time between 2 fax ma-

chines over IP. Following fax detection during a call, the voice codec will switch to

T.38.

Data: trp

Transparent or clear mode (RFC 4040). Transparent relay of 64 kbit/s data streams.

gnx64:

Clear channel codec

ccd:

Clear channel data (as per RFC3108)

Define a special profile for data call origination or destination numbers. Bear in mind that echo

cancelation in this VoIP profile might be switched off (VoipECE=no).

VoipMaxChan=<count>

Maximum number of channels that can be used with the profile. If this parameter is not defined

(default), there will be no limit.

NOTE: For versions 13.0c or lower, we recommend that you also set the parameter

VoipDelayDisc to Yes to improve the ASR.

Table 5.26 route.cfg: VoIP basic parameters (continued)

VoIP Basic Parameters

5 Configuration files

Page 78CELLX 16.2

Please refer to Chapter 9 Additional VoIP parameters for information on other possible en-

tries.

Management parameters

VoipSilenceSuppression=<mode>

Yes activates silence suppression, CNG (comfort noise generation) and VAD (voice activity detec-

tion). No (default) deactivates silence suppression.

NOTE: In SIP signaling, silence suppression is negotiated as per RFC3555.

VoipTxM=<num> or <list> fix

The multiplication factor (1-12) for the frame size for transmission of RTP packets (default is 4).

10ms is the default frame size (20ms for CELLX32). A list can be defined if different frame sizes

are to be used for different codecs in the VoIP profile. The list must correspond with the list in the

parameter VoipCompression.

Normally the peer’s frame size will be used if it is smaller than the one defined. If you enter fix,

the configured factor will always be used.

Table 5.26 route.cfg: VoIP basic parameters (continued)

VoIP Basic Parameters

Table 5.27 route.cfg: VoIP management parameters

VoIP Management Parameters

VoipGk=<list>

Name of the assigned gatekeeper profile. You can assign a profile to several gatekeepers to define

backup gatekeepers for a VoIP profile. In this case, the next gatekeeper will be used if the previous

one fails.

VoipProxy=<ip addr>

Enter the IP address of the SIP server.

VoipUser=<username>

Define the username for the remote device if authentication is required (SIP only).

VoipPwd=<password>

Define the password for the remote device if authentication is required (SIP only).

VoipRegistrar=<name>

Enter the name of a registrar to be used for the VoIP profile.

VoipRadiusAuthenticate=<name>

Enter the name of the Radius server to activate user authentication.

VoipRadiusAccounting=<name>

Enter the name of the Radius server to activate accounting. If the call is sent to the mobile net-

work, the SIM card’s IMSI is transferred in the Vendor attribute: Vendor-2170-Attr-1 = in hexa-

decimal notation in the following format: IMSI=<IMSI>

VoipRadiusIMSINegotiation=<mode>

If yes is entered, the <system> will negotiate the IMSI to be used in the Radius access request. It

will transmit the IMSI in the RADIUS attribute: Filter-Id (11). Default no.

NOTE: The call number of the dial attempts must begin with the LAIN or the port number

if CHADDR is not used. The following routing entry must be added:

MapAll*??01:<LAIN>=<LAIN>*??01:

5 Configuration files

Page 79CELLX 16.2

5.3.3 Gatekeeper profiles

Gatekeeper profiles are used to connect the CELLX to several systems by using a gatekeeper

if the protocol is H.323. It is possible to configure different gatekeepers for different destina-

tions and to define backup gatekeepers. These gatekeeper profiles are then assigned to the

VoIP profiles.

VoipIpLogging=<mode>

Enter Yes to activate recording IP addresses in the CDRs (default is No). The first IP address is the

signaling address and the second is the RTP address, followed by the the codec and the frame size

used. The IMSI appears after the IP addresses if the keyword IMSI is defined in the pabx.cfg.

Example of a CDR entry:

21.08.07-11:01:42,21.08.07-

11:01:58,40,912345,192.168.0.2:192.168.0.2,G729,10,0101,16,10,0

Example of a failed log entry:

21.08.07-11:11:30,40,91234,192.168.0.2:192.168.0.2,G729,10,0101,ff,2,1

VoipStatLogging=<mode>

When Yes is entered, statistic values (for example fraction lost, round trip time, and so on) for the

VoIP profile are saved into the protocol.log file every ten minutes. This is helpful during problem

analysis when IP issues occur (default = No).

VoipHold=<mode>

Determines the behavior of the HOLD feature if a PBX sends an Re-INVITE message for HOLD to

the gateway.

transparent: HOLD is sent to PSTN

notify: HOLD is sent as notification to the telephone exchange

ignore: HOLD is not sent to the telephone exchange - the gateway suppresses the messages to

PSTN

VoipSelectProfilesBySignalling=<Yes/No>

When Yes is entered, VoipSignalling=<int> is taken as the criterion for selecting a voip-profile for

an incom-ing voip call, i.e. the signalling for this voip call must match the VoipSignalling param-

eter in this profile. Default No.

Table 5.27 route.cfg: VoIP management parameters (continued)

VoIP Management Parameters

Table 5.28 route.cfg: gatekeeper parameters

Gatekeeper Parameters

[Gatekeeper:<name>]

Name of the gatekeeper profile.

RasPort=<port>

Indicates the port the gatekeeper uses (default 1719) for registration, admission and status.

OwnRasPort=<port>

Indicates the port the system uses (default 1719) for registration, admission and status.

RasPrefix=<list>

CELLX’s defined prefix(es). Use a space to separate entries.

RasId=<name>

The alias used for gatekeeper registration.

GkId=<name>

The gatekeeper’s alias.

5 Configuration files

Page 80CELLX 16.2

5.3.4 Registrar profiles

Registrar profiles are used to register the CELLX with a SIP registrar. It is possible to configure

different registrars for different destinations and to define backup registrars. These registrar

profiles are then assigned to the VoIP profiles.

GkPwd=<name>

Password to log onto the gatekeeper. If you do not use authentication, leave this entry blank.

GkAdd=<ip addr>

The gatekeeper’s IP address.

GkTtl=<sec>

Gatekeeper time to live (default 0 means infinite).

GkMaxChan=<count>

Max. number of channels used for this gatekeeper. If this parameter is not defined (default), there

will be no limit.

GkDynMaxChan=<mode>

The static number of available channels in the gatekeeper profile (GkMaxChan=<count>) is re-

placed with a dynamic number of active mobile ports (up to the number entered in GkMaxChan)

when Yes is entered here. Default is No.

GkUseStun=<mode>

Enter yes (default) to use the STUN values for the GK profile.

GkTerminalAliasWithPrefix=<mode>

Some gatekeepers may require that prefixes are listed in the Terminal Alias section. Enter Yes to

activate this function; default value is No).

GkTerminalTypeWithPrefix=<mode>

Enter no to deactivate sending the Dialed Prefix Information in the Registration Request (default

yes).

GkDynRai=<mode>

When yes is entered, the GK receives an RAI (resource availability indication) when a status

change occurs on the available mobile channels. When no is entered, the RAI is sent with each

ARQ (admission request) and DRQ (disengaged request). Default is no.

GkNoResourceAvailableIndication=<mode>

With this parameter the <system> will not send RAI indications to the Gatekeeper. Default No.

Table 5.28 route.cfg: gatekeeper parameters (continued)

Gatekeeper Parameters

Table 5.29 route.cfg: registrar parameters

Registrar Parameters

[Registrar:<name>]

The name of the registrar profile.

RegId=<name or ip addr>

Host name or IP address used in the register’s request header. Bear in mind that the DNS service

must be active if you enter the host name.

RegOwnId=<name@ip addr/domain>

Typically a host name or telephone number followed by an @ sign and a domain name or IP ad-

dress. The entry used in the From: field. The default setting is RegUser@RegId.

5 Configuration files

Page 81CELLX 16.2

5.3.5 Radius profiles

Radius profiles are used to connect the CELLX to a Radius server. You can use a Radius server

for different destinations and for access and/or accounting. These Radius profiles are then as-

signed to the VoIP profiles.

RegSameCallID=<mode>

When Yes is set (default), the same caller ID is always used for SIP registration. Set No to change

the caller ID for each SIP registration.

RegContact=<name or ip addr>

Used in the Contact: field.

RegContactParam=<string>

Sets additional header-parameters in the contact field (for example the q-value: RegContact-

Param=q=1.0).

RegUser=<name>

Enter a username for authorization.

RegPwd=<password>

Enter a password for authorization.

RegProxy=<ip addr>

Enter an alternative IP address if you want the request to be sent to an address other than the

one entered in RegId.

RegExpires=<sec>

Enter the number of seconds registration is to be valid. Default 0 means infinite.

RegPing=<sec>

Interval (in seconds) for the registrar ping. The CELLX sends an empty UDP packet to the registrar’s

IP address. The packet is essentially an alive packet to avoid possible firewall problems.

RegSignalling=<int>

Determines the profile’s signaling protocol for registration with the SIP registrar.

1=SIP udp (default)

2=SIP tcp

3=SIP tls

RegUseReceived=<mode>

Enter Yes when an CELLX appears behind a NAT and STUN cannot be used. Default No..

RegSameCallID=<mode>

The same call ID is used for SIP registration Enter No to change the call ID for every reregistration.

(default Yes).

Table 5.29 route.cfg: registrar parameters (continued)

Registrar Parameters

Table 5.30 route.cfg: radius parameters

Radius Parameters

[Radius:<name>]

The name of the Radius server profile assigned to one or more VoIP profiles.

Host=<name or ip addr>

Radius server’s host name or IP address. Bear in mind that the DNS service must be active if you

enter the host name.

5 Configuration files

Page 82CELLX 16.2

User=<name>

Enter a username for authorization.

Password=<password>

Enter a password for authorization.

Secret=<secret>

Enter the shared secret.

OwnId=<name or ip addr>

Host name or IP address used in the NAS identifier or NAS IP address (Cisco VSA gateway ID).

ServiceType=<num>

As defined in RFC 2865, Chapter 5.6.

RequestTimeout=<sec>

Number of seconds during which the request is repeated if the Radius server does not respond.

RequestRetries=<count>

Number of packet retries sent at one time.

StopOnly=<mode>

When yes is entered, only Accounting Request Messages with the status type stop are transmit-

ted to the Radius server.

AlwaysConnected=<mode>

Enter No (default) to set the value for the field ConnectedTime to that of the field Disconnect-

edTime in accounting-stop messages when the call was not connected.

CallingStationId=<num>

This parameter is used to set the calling station ID. The default setting is the OAD, but you can

define any calling station ID. To define a partial calling station ID, enter a ? for each digit. For ex-

ample, CallingStationId=??? will consist of the first three digits of the OAD.

CallType=<int>

Enter one of the following to define the call type:

3 = VoIP and telephony

2 = VoIP only

1 = Telephony only

FramedProtocol=<int>

Enter one of the following to define the framed protocol (see RFC 2865, Chapter 5.7):

1 = PPP

2 = SLIP

3 = AppleTalk Remote Access Protocol (ARAP)

4 = Gandalf proprietary SingleLink/MultiLink protocol

5 = Xylogics proprietary IPX/SLIP

6 = X.75 Synchronous

NasId=<string>

The string entered is used as network access server identifier attribute in access requests. If no

string is entered, the attribute will not be set (default).

Table 5.30 route.cfg: radius parameters (continued)

Radius Parameters

6 Routing examples

Page 84CELLX 16.2

6.1 CELLX integration in an H.323 carrier network

In the following example, an CELLX32 is integrated in a carrier network via H.323. The system

contains six SIM cards for each mobile channel, and the SIM 24 Carrier is used. All calls com-

ing from VoIP are routed to the mobile network. Four VoIP Modules with 16 media channels

each are attached in the system. H.323 is used as the signaling protocol and a gatekeeper is

used in the VoIP network. Because the gatekeeper assigns and authorizes the peer, only one

VoIP profile is necessary. Since the peers may use various compression algorithms, you can

define several if you so choose. The codec with the highest priority is G.729. If the peer does

not support it, G.726 32Bit/sec, G.711a, G.711u are also possible. Silence suppression is ac-

tive. The gatekeeper’s IP address is 192.168.0.10. This gatekeeper profile can handle up to

30 simultaneous VoIP calls. This value is dynamic and changes depending on the number of

active SIM cards. The CELLX’s alias is iGATE01. The prefix list is 01555 01556 01444 01445.

The gatekeeper’s alias is GK1 and no password is used. Calls with the prefixes 01555 and

01556 are sent to the carrier with the LAIN 26212 at controllers 0-15. Calls with the prefixes

01444 and 01445 are sent to the carrier with the LAIN 26313 (controllers 16-31). Digit col-

lection is activated, so that incoming calls with overlap dialing are not transmitted until the

number is complete or a wait timer (5 seconds) has run out. The NEXT parameter makes sure

that calls are distributed evenly to the individual mobile channels in the trunk group. The pa-

rameter CHADDR ensures that calls are not misrouted, since the controller definition changes

to the SIM card’s LAIN when a SIM card is mistakenly used for another mobile controller.

Problems can occur when SMS messages are also sent, as service center numbers are defini-

tively configured. The parameter LIMIT is set so that the system automatically switches to the

mobile controllers’ SIM cards when the active SIM card has been used for 3600 seconds. The

parameter CONTINUE makes sure the mobile channel switches to the first SIM card after the

limit has been reached on the last SIM card. The SIM card will not switch until currently active

calls have been disconnected.

Figure 6.1 CELLX integration with SIM card switching in an H.323 carrier network

Example 6.1 CELLX integration with SIM card switching in an H.323 carrier network (pabx.cfg)

Subscriber00 = TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,+00000,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR

LIMIT[3600,3600,3600,3600,3600,3600] CONTINUE ALARM NEXT

Subscriber01 = TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,+00000,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR

LIMIT[3600,3600,3600,3600,3600,3600] CONTINUE ALARM

....

Subscriber34 = TRANSPARENT ROUTER SWITCH CHMAX[16] ALARM

Subscriber35 = TRANSPARENT ROUTER SWITCH CHMAX[16] ALARM

ChargeUnitGenerate=1

LimitWODisc=ON

6 Routing examples

Page 85CELLX 16.2

6.2 CELLX as a second-generation LCR with VoIP

In the following example of a PBX connection, all mobile calls are terminated through the mo-

bile channels. Eight mobile channels form a group for one mobile network. One SIM card is

available on each mobile channel. Digit collection is activated, so that incoming calls with

overlap dialing are not transmitted until the number is complete or a wait timer (5 seconds)

has run out. The NEXT parameter makes sure that calls are distributed evenly to the individual

mobile channels in the trunk group. If all of a carrier’s SIM cards are busy, rerouting

(redirect3) via PSTN is automatically initiated. All international calls are terminated to VoIP

(40). The system contains two VoIP Modules, for a total of 32 media channels. The VoIP car-

rier profile DF and the SIP protocol are used. National calls are routed through the carrier with

the prefix 010xx. All other calls are sent to the PSTN unchanged. All calls from the PSTN or

from a VoIP carrier are sent directly to the NT controller, to which the PBX is attached. All in-

coming calls from the mobile networks are routed to the PBX’s central number (001). For the

Example 6.2 CELLX integration with SIM card switching in an H.323 carrier network (route.cfg)

[System]

DTMFWaitDial=5

MapAll01555=|2621201555<<17

MapAll01556=|2621201556<<17

MapAll01444=|2621301444<<17

MapAll01445=|2621301445<<17

[Voip:DF]

VoipDirection=In

VoipPeerAddress=10.0.0.0

VoipIpMask=0xffff0000

VoipSignalling=0

VoipCompression=g729 g72632 g711a g711u

VoipSilenceSuppression=Yes

VoipMaxChan=30

VoipTxM=2

VoipGk=GK1

[Gatekeeper:GK1]

RasPort=1719

OwnRasPort=1719

RasId=iGATE01

RasPrefix=01555 01556 01444 01445

GkId=GK

GkAdd=192.168.0.10

GkPwd=

GkTtl=300

GkMaxChan=30

GkDynMaxChan=Yes

6 Routing examples

Page 86CELLX 16.2

VoIP profile DF, the system uses the registrar reg and registers with user@sip-carrier.de,

username user and password pwd. SIP UDP is used for signaling. A maximum of 30 media

channels with the G.729 codec can be used. The Peer is sip-carrier.de.

Figure 6.2 CELLX as a second-generation LCR with VoIP

Example 6.3 CELLX as a second-generation LCR with VoIP (pabx.cfg)

Subscriber00 = TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,+00000,1,1,1,SIM4] CHADDR ALARM

Subscriber01 = TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,+00000,1,1,1,SIM4] CHADDR ALARM

....

Subscriber08 = TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,+00000,1,1,1,SIM4] CHADDR ALARM

Subscriber09 = TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,+00000,1,1,1,SIM4] CHADDR ALARM

....

Subscriber16 = TRANSPARENT ROUTER ALARM

Subscriber17 = TRANSPARENT ROUTER ALARM

Subscriber18 = TRANSPARENT ROUTER SWITCH CHMAX[16] ALARM

Subscriber19 = TRANSPARENT ROUTER SWITCH CHMAX[16] ALARM

7 Mobile configuration options

Page 88CELLX 16.2

7.1 Network-specific mobile routing

7.1.1 Routing decisions for calls to the mobile network

Internal routing decisions

Usually, routing decisions are made internally by the gateway. Calls to the mobile network

are routed based on the first digits of the called destination number (mobile network access

number) via a port or LAIN. The mapping looks like this:

MapAll<mobile network access number>=<port/LAIN><mobile network access

number>

In the example shown below, calls to the mobile network access number 0172 are routed via

port 20.

In the example below, calls to 0176 are routed via the LAIN 26227. To route via LAIN, the

keyword CHADDR needs to be added to the mobile port’s Subscriber configuration.

External routing decisions

In some cases, the routing decision needs to be made before the call arrives on the gateway.

This can be done by adding a technical prefix to the called number.

Each prefix represents a national mobile network. For instance 7777# could be the prefix to

route calls to the LAIN 26222, 8888# could route calls to the LAIN 26227.

If a call to the mobile network arrives on the gateway containing a technical prefix, this prefix

needs to be removed in the MapAll parameter and replaced by the port or LAIN. The config-

uration is:

MapAll<technical prefix>=<port/LAIN>

The mapping can be extended to contain the mobile network access number.

MapAll<technical prefix><mobile network access number>=<port/LAIN><mobile

network access number>

In the following example, calls containing the prefix 7777# are routed via port 20. Calls con-

taining the prefix 8888# are routed via port 21.

Example 7.1 Internal routing decision 1

MapAll0172=200172

Example 7.2 Internal routing decision 2

MapAll0176=262270176

Example 7.3 External routing 1

MapAll7777#=20

MapAll8888#=21

7 Mobile configuration options

Page 89CELLX 16.2

In the following example, calls which come in with the prefix 9999# and the mobile network

access number 0176 are routed via the LAIN 26227 to 0176.

7.1.2 Using the LAIN as the mobile port address

Use the LAIN as controller with the CHADDR parameter to prevent logging onto the wrong

SIM card. This will ensure that routing is network specific. The following example is based on

the German country code. One carrier’s LAIN is 26212 and the other carrier’s LAIN is 26213.

Example 7.4 External routing 2

MapAll9999#0176=262270176

Example 7.5 Using the LAIN as the mobile port address (pabx.cfg)

...

Controller00=20 GSM

Controller01=20 GSM

Controller02=20 GSM

Controller03=20 GSM

Controller04=20 GSM

Controller05=20 GSM

Controller06=20 GSM

Controller07=20 GSM

...

Subscriber00=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,+49556,1,1,1,SIM4] CHADDR ALARM

Subscriber01=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,+49556,1,1,1,SIM4] CHADDR ALARM

Subscriber02=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,+49556,1,1,1,SIM4] CHADDR ALARM

Subscriber03=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,+49556,1,1,1,SIM4] CHADDR ALARM

Subscriber04=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,+49555,1,1,1,SIM4] CHADDR ALARM

Subscriber05=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,+49555,1,1,1,SIM4] CHADDR ALARM

Subscriber06=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,+49555,1,1,1,SIM4] CHADDR ALARM

Subscriber07=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,+49555,1,1,1,SIM4] CHADDR ALARM

...

If you remove the keyword CHADDR from the pabx.cfg, you must restart the system. Control-

lers belonging to the same trunk group must have the same address. You must delete all rout-

ing entries based on port addresses when using the LAIN as controller.

Example 7.6 Using the LAIN as the mobile port address (route.cfg)

...

MapAll01555=2621201555

...

MapAll01556=2621301556

...

7 Mobile configuration options

Page 90CELLX 16.2

7.1.3 Fixed LAIN for a mobile port

Enter CHADDR[<addr>] to remove a mobile controller belonging to an LAIN group from the

standard routing process (for example for specific routes or only for SMS transmission). The

port address can be set to <addr>.

7.2 Incoming voice calls from mobile

Incoming mobile calls (service indicator 01 represents voice calls) can be routed to a specified

number. This enables each mobile controller to receive a unique identifier. It will then be

mapped to a number.

The mobile controllers can also have the same identifier, so that all voice calls (service indica-

tor 01) from controller 20 are sent to number 1111 at port 9. This number could, for example,

serve a call center.

7.3 Blocking ports

This function allows you to block a port, so that the corresponding mobile channel is omitted

from the distribution of calls. The function is particularly useful when mobile channels fail or

SIM cards cannot be immediately replaced.

To disable the port for outgoing calls enter the keyword CHINC[01,01] in the Subscriber

line and restart the system.

In the following example, port 04 is blocked for outgoing calls.

Example 7.7 Fixed LAIN for a mobile port

Subscriber05=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,+49555,1,1,1,SIM4] CHADDR[444]

ALARM

MapAllSMS=444 DATA

The value entered for <addr> may not exceed 6 digits.

Example 7.8 Incoming voice calls from mobile 1

Restrict20=90123 01

Restrict21=91234 01

Example 7.9 Incoming voice calls from mobile 2

Restrict20=91111 01

7 Mobile configuration options

Page 91CELLX 16.2

To enable the port for outgoing calls, remove the entry and enter Activate Configuration.

7.4 Mobile user PBX callback

When the CELLX is implemented in a corporate network and connected to a PBX or between

a PBX and the outside line, the following configuration entry activates a feature, that uses a

mobile caller’s OAD to connect with the last PBX extension the caller unsuccessfully dialed.

DialBack=<hours>

The callback list is active for the number of hours entered.

DialBackMinutes=<minutes>

The callback is active for the number of minutes entered. After that time, the callback record

is deleted in the system.

DialBackStopOnConnect=<mode>

Deletes (On) the dialback record once a dialback call is connected. Off deactivates this behav-

ior.

DialBackCompare=<digits>

Shows the number of digits at the end of a phone number that are compared during dialback

handling. The default value is 10. Comparison of the end part of numbers is necessary when

the same number is displayed differently (when, for instance, one version includes the country

code, but the other doesn’t).

For calls coming from VoIP, add the following parameter to the used VoIP profile:

VoipOadIn=<name of profile used for callback>:

Enter the name of the VoIP profile that you use to call back the extension.

In the following example, the callback list is active for the previous five hours. The German

country code is used for the LAINs. All calls with the prefixes 1111 and 2222 are terminated

through the carrier with the LAIN 26212. Calls with the prefix 3333 are terminated through

the carrier with the LAIN 26213.

Example 7.10 Blocking ports

...

Subscriber04=TRANSPARENT ROUTER [0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM4] CHADDR ALARM

CHINC[01,01]

...

Incoming calls are always possible. The status is not displayed in the GATE Manager.

Example 7.11 Mobile user PBX callback

DialBack=5

MapAll1111=262121111

MapAll2222=262122222

MapAll3333=262133333

7 Mobile configuration options

Page 92CELLX 16.2

7.5 Optional mobile quality parameters

The following parameters can be set for specific carriers if SIM cards for different mobile net-

works are used and different configurations must be set.

For all controllers without a LAIN, the following default setting applies: GSM=

Up to four additional carrier-specific entries may be set:

GSM1=<Lain1> ALFI[<val1/val0>]...

GSM2=<Lain2> ...

GSM3=<Lain3> ...

GSM4=<Lain4> ...

Up to four LAIN-specific configurations are possible. The user must enter the index (1 to 4).

The LAIN appears as the first entry behind the equal sign. Everything else follows.

The following table describes specific signaling and quality parameters for configuration of

the mobile interface.

Make sure that no Restrict entries are configured for these mobile controllers.

Bear in mind that for iGATE UMTS you must use the keyword UMTS= instead of GSM=!

The following syntax applies: UMTS1=<Lain1> ALFI[<val1/val0>]...

There is no automatic default behavior for this feature! All options must always be entered.

We recommend that you enter GSM= settings, as all controllers without a LAIN or with a de-

fault address use these options!

Table 7.1 Optional mobile parameters

GSM=... (for iGATE GSM) or UMTS= … (for iGATE UMTS)

Enter any of the following parameters after the equal sign for the following functions. Entries may

appear in any order, but all entries must appear in the same line and in double-digit notation as fol-

lows:

GSM=RSSI[10] STOP[18,08] ANNOUNCE[00,08] FAX[a2] ASR[20,35]

UMTS=RSSI[10] STOP[18,08] ANNOUNCE[00,08] FAX[a2] ASR[20,35]

ALERT[<sec>] Set this parameter to generate an alert signal in the D channel im-

mediately after the dial-end signal. If you enter optional square

brackets containing a number of seconds, the alert signal will oc-

cur when the number entered has passed following setup.

7 Mobile configuration options

Page 93CELLX 16.2

ANNOUNCE Set this parameter to define what happens when a recorded an-

nouncement is detected:

No ANNOUNCE entry (default)

A D-channel PROGRESS message stating Inband Information

Available will be generated

ANNOUNCE[<cause>]

The connection will be rejected with the defined ISDN cause

value. Do not enter the cause value ff!

ANNOUNCE[00,<sec>]

A timeout for voice detection is defined in seconds (default

value: 120 seconds). After the interval entered has passed, the

connection is torn down.

ANNOUNCE[ff]

The call will be connected as soon as an announcement is de-

tected.

FORWARD[<cause>] For GE864-QUAD modules only

The connection will be rejected with the defined ISDN cause value

when call forwarding is detected.

NOTE: The GSM network must support this feature for it to

work.

ASAL Announcement Stop during ALert: Set this parameter to release

calls if the GSM network sends an alert message, after which voice

is detected (for example the B-party rejects the call, which is then

forwarded to the B-party’s voicemail following the ring state).

The parameter ANNOUNCE[<cause>] must be set to activate this

parameter.

MINV[<count>] Minimum Voice detections: Parameter used with ASAL to define

the number of voice detections in a row before the call is released

(for example GSM-network background noise detected as voice).

The default value is 1, but 2 is recommended.

The parameters ANNOUNCE[<cause>] and ASAL must be set to

activate this parameter.

ASR[<limit>,

<calls>]

Allows you to change the default value (40 calls at 30% ASR). For

a definition of ASR, see Chapter 11.4.1 Generating and retrieving

CDRs.

CDC[<seconds>,

<count>]

Call duration check. When more than (<count>) connected calls in

a row occur with a call duration lower than <seconds>, an alarm

is generated and the port is restarted.

FAX[<cause>] This entry allows you to reject fax calls with the defined cause val-

ue.

RSSI[<limit>] Configure this parameter to set a limit for the reception field

strength. When the reception field strength falls below this limit,

the mobile channel will be blocked. If the field strength is above

the limit, the mobile channel will log on with the mobile carrier

again. The values used are 0 to 31, which represent the following

field strengths: -113dBm to -51 dBm. An error is generated in the

protocol log. The result must be divided by 2.

EXAMPLE: To define a field strength of -95 dBm, subtract -95

from-113 and divide the result by 2:

- 113dB - (-95dB) = -18dB / 2 = 9

Enter RSSI[9]

Table 7.1 Optional mobile parameters (continued)

GSM=... (for iGATE GSM) or UMTS= … (for iGATE UMTS)

7 Mobile configuration options

Page 94CELLX 16.2

STOP[<val1>,

<val2>]

This entry allows you to define a maximum number of connection

setups that always result in a recorded message (<val1>) without

an alert detection or call-connected signal. The second value

(<val2>) counts calls that connect immediately without an Alert

detection. The mobile port is blocked when the defined value is

reached and an entry is recorded in the log file (...Err: Voice). In this

way inactive SIM cards that are forwarded to a recording (with or

without a connect from the mobile carrier) can be detected and

blocked so that they are removed from the routing process. The

default status of this function is off.

NOCP When this option is configured and the call is from ISDN to GSM,

the Call Proceeding signaling message will be eliminated from sig-

naling. This may be necessary if the ISDN peer does not support

Call Proceeding. Bear in mind that the peer’s Setup Ack Timer is

usually set at 5 seconds, which means that an Alert must be gen-

erated as follows:

GSM=ALERT[5] (for iGATE GSM)

UMTS=ALERT[5] (for iGATE UMTS)

FMIN[xxx] FMAX[yyy] Sets the frequency range for ringtone detection (default 400-444

Hz).

EXAMPLE:

GSM=FMIN[400] FMAX[444] (for iGATE GSM)

UMTS=FMIN[400] FMAX[444] (for iGATE UMTS)

ALFI[<val1/val0>] GSM module GE864-QUAD only.

Switches the digital filter on (val=1) the Telit module to suppress

frequencies below 250 Hz per LAIN during alerting. (switch off

val=0)

Please use the parameter to enable alert-tone detection for dual

tone LAINs only (please see Chapter 7.5 Optional mobile quality

parameters).

VOICE[<sec>] The voice channel in the switching matrix is connected after <sec>

(default immediately). The voice channel is activated no later than

the point at which the call is connected.

WND9 Voice detection is activated in the GSM module if the GSM net-

work signals WND9 (voice). If this parameter is not set, voice de-

tection is activated immediately when the GSM call is initialized.

Module Q24xx only.

WND2A Generates Alert when WIND:2 is received.

Module Q24xx only.

WND2N Suppresses voice detection after WIND:2 is received.

Module Q24xx only.

MINA[<count>] Defines the number of alert tones that are required before an Alert

is detected.

Table 7.1 Optional mobile parameters (continued)

GSM=... (for iGATE GSM) or UMTS= … (for iGATE UMTS)

7 Mobile configuration options

Page 95CELLX 16.2

7.6 Deactivating mobile rerouting

Use the following entries in the pabx.cfg to deactivate rerouting for rejected calls.

REDIAL[<percent>,

<waitmin>,

<waitmax>,

<callingmin>,

<callingmax>,

<connectmin>,

<connectmax>,

<cfg>]

Repeats a call to the same B-party number as soon as the A party

hangs up. This parameter is useful for improving call statistics:

Percent: Percentage of calls (including alert only)

through the gateway that are redialed.

Waitmin: Minimum number of seconds the

gateway waits before redial.

Waitmax: Maximum number of seconds the

gateway waits before redial.

Callingmin: Minimum number of seconds the

gateway waits before call setup for redial. We

recommend no more than 8 seconds.

Callingmax: Maximum number of seconds the

gateway waits before call setup for redial. We

recommend no less than 15 seconds.

Connectmin: Minimum connect time (in seconds) if

call is connected.

Connectmax: Maximum connect time (in seconds)

before call is disconnected.

Cfg: Enter a value 1 – 4; valid for the 1= line to 4= line

for the iGATE GSM, or for the 1= line to 4= line for

the iGATE UMTS.

CPSA[0|1] When CPSA ist set to 0, the GSM port is forced to register the SIM

card to it’s home network, which is identified by the first 5 or 6

digits of the IMSI. This may result in a faster registration process.

CPSA[1] is the default value.

Table 7.1 Optional mobile parameters (continued)

GSM=... (for iGATE GSM) or UMTS= … (for iGATE UMTS)

Table 7.2 Deactivating mobile rerouting

Parameters

AllClassNext=<mode>

Enter AllClassNext=Off to deactivate rerouting for all rejected calls, regardless of the cause value

(default not configured).

NOTE: You cannot configure both AllClassNext and Class2Next simultaneously!

Class2Next=off

Enter Class2Next=Off to deactivate rerouting for calls rejected with a class 2 cause value (default

not configured).

NOTE: You cannot configure both AllClassNext and Class2Next simultaneously!

SelfNext=<int>

Set this parameter to reroute a failed call through the same port. <int> defines the number of call

attempts. Recommended values for <int> are 2 or 3. Bear in mind that this parameter must be

used in conjunction with the parameter AllClassNext=Off. Default not configured.

EXAMPLE:

SelfNext=3

AllClassesNext=Off

7 Mobile configuration options

Page 96CELLX 16.2

7.7 Setting autodial

When the following configuration is set, the gateway calls a defined list of phone numbers

automatically. Save the script in a text file with the extension *.ad.

The autodial process starts automatically when the script file has been copied to /boot or /

data. The file extension is renamed *.ax and is deleted when process has ended. A log file

*.al is generated in the course of the process. The file contains whether the call was success-

ful, the number called, the call duration for successful calls, and the cause value for failed

calls. To abort the process, simply delete the *.ax file.

The following settings are possible:

OPTION CALLDURATION: Enter an interval in seconds to define the length of the call.

OPTION CALLRETRIES: Enter the number of call attempts for each number.

OPTION CONFIGURATION: Refers to the number of the = configuration.

OPTION NOALARM: Set this option to suppress sending alarms when connected to a

vGATE.

D<sec>: Enter a value to define the duration for calls to this number.

P<sec>: Enter a value to define the pause between calls.

7.8 Disconnecting calls after ring

When the following parameter is configured, the call will be disconnected once the number

of configured seconds have passed after the mobile network has sent the first ring:

AWSTime=<sec>

7.9 Checking ports/mobile channels

Monitoring ASR for mobile ports

ASR monitoring of the last 40 calls occurs for all mobile ports. If the ASR (ASR2) is lower than

30 percent, an alarm is generated at the corresponding port and the port is blocked. The port

is then restarted and a corresponding entry appears in the protocol.log file (ASR). The port is

then unblocked.

The following entry in the pabx.cfg causes the mobile port to block automatically when this

error occurs three times in a row:

ASRBlock=On

When ASRBlock=Off is used, the port will be restarted and will remain open.

The following parameter in the pabx.cfg file allows you to change the default value (30%

for 40 calls):

GSM=ASR[<percent>,<number of calls>] (for iGATE GSM)

Example 7.12 Setting autodial

OPTION CALLDURATION 155-170

OPTION CALLRETRIES 2

OPTION CONFIGURATION 1

OPTION NOALARM

017222921 D10 P30

017222922 D10 P30

017222923 D10 P30

017222924 D10 P30

7 Mobile configuration options

Page 97CELLX 16.2

UMTS=ASR[<percent>,<number of calls>] (for iGATE UMTS)

7.10 Defining special characters for voice calls

In cases in which the called number includes special characters (for example * or #), it may be

necessary to define the call type used in the mobile network (command or voice call). Calls to

GSM or CDMA that begin with * or #, are sent as command calls by default. For voice calls

beginning with * or #, you must define the call type voice in the mapping entry with a > sign.

The routing entry will look like this:

MapAll<num>=<LAIN>><num>

Example 7.13 Monitoring ASR for mobile ports (iGATE GSM)

GSM=ASR[20,35]

Example 7.14 Monitoring ASR for mobile ports (iGATE UMTS)

UMTS=ASR[20,35]

Example 7.15 Defining special characters for voice calls

MapAll222=11111>*222

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 99CELLX 16.2

8.1 Least cost routing

CELLXs are connected between the customer’s private branch exchange (PBX) and the public

telephone network (ISDN) and/or VoIP. The customer saves connection charges and can ef-

fortlessly and automatically connect to the corporate network as needed using one of six

routing methods:

Carrier selection

Dedicated lines

Direct line access with subaddressing

Direct line access with DTMF

Callback with subaddressing

Callback with DTMF

This manual contains information only on carrier selection. If you would like to configure any

other variation, please contact TELES or refer to the TELES Infrastructure Systems Manual Ver-

sion 4.5, Chapter 3.

Calls are routed transparently for the PBX and its users. CELLXs can generate charges and

route calls using alternate settings in case of network failures. The provider can access the

system via ISDN for routine maintenance and monitoring.

The following additional services are supported by this feature package:

Generation of charges

Time-controlled configuration

Alternative routing

8.1.1 Carrier selection

Carrier selection is currently one of the most commonly used routing methods supported by

the CELLX. In the CELLX, this routing process also includes direct calls into the mobile network

or through a VoIP network. That means the system is a full-fledged second generation LCR.

8.1.1.1 Routing entries

Use the MapAll command to route calls using Carrier Selection.

Use the following syntax for connections routed via the provider:

MapAll<AreaCode>=9<CarrierSelection><AreaCode>.

where <AreaCode> is the number or number range to be routed and <CarrierSelection>

is the access number required to reach the provider’s network.

For unrouted connections (placed via the public telephone network), use:

MapAll<AreaCode>=9<AreaCode>.

To block undesired carrier selection prefixes use:

MapAll<CarrierSelection>=&91;(Busy signal)

In the following example, calls to international destinations are terminated through the VoIP

interface. The profile names iG1 and iG2 in the routing entries refer to different VoIP carriers.

Calls to the mobile network (01555 and 01556) are routed directly through SIM cards for the

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 100CELLX 16.2

corresponding mobile carriers (LAIN 26212 and 26213). All other national long distance and

local calls are routed through an alternative carrier (01019). All calls from the PSTN to the PBX

are put through transparently.

8.1.2 Alternative routing settings

Alternative routing refers to the ability to establish connections using a different (alternative)

network in case of provider failure (for example all mobile controllers are in use). Alternative

routing ensures uninterrupted operation of the attached PBX. In such cases, connections are

often made via the public network using the Redirect command.

MapAll<num>=<port><num>

Redirect3<port><num>=<placeholder>

MapAll<placeholder>=<alt port><num>

Example 8.1 Carrier selection routing entries

MapAll001=40iG1:001

MapAll0044=40iG2:0044

...

MapAll01555=2621201555

MapAll01556=2621301556

...

MapAll01=90101901

MapAll02=90101902

...

MapAll09=90101909

MapAll1=9010191

MapAll2=9010192

...

MapAll9=9010199

Restrict9=10

Be sure to enter phone numbers in the routing file in ascending order.

Example 8.2 Alternative routing settings

MapAll01555=2621201555

Redirect32621201555=A

MapAllA=901555

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 101CELLX 16.2

8.1.3 Charge models

CELLXs can either generate charge information or transmit received charges from the public

or corporate networks to the attached PBX. Charge simulation is achieved using variables,

which ensure a great degree of flexibility for the implementation of many different charge

models including:

Charge units per time unit

Flat rate (initial charge without time interval)

Initial charge plus time interval

Initial charge plus time interval after delay

Time interval and/or flat rate plus received charges

Received charges only or no charge information

Initial toll-free period with retroactive charge generation afterwards

Price-per-minute (with whole second accuracy)

In this chapter, unit means that charge information is transmitted as a whole-numbered val-

ue, and currency means that the charge information is sent as a currency amount (for exam-

ple EUR 3.45). The charge impulse generation options can be set for each mapping by adding

charge-specific arguments to the MapAll commands as shown below. The use of each vari-

able is explained in Table 8.1.

MapAllsrc=dst mode time start/wait.

Any external charges can be added to the generated charges by adding 128 to the start value.

(The value range for the initial unit level is still set from 0 to 127). The maximum supported

number of units per connection is 32767 units.

Additional adjustments may be made to allow for the implementation of new charge models.

When charge information is sent as Currency, values can be expressed in thousandths

for greater precision in charge calculation.

For the internal Layer 3 protocols, charges can be specified to the third decimal place

(thousandth) using the /Value option (Example: /Value:1.056). In this fashion, charges

can be generated for units of currency requiring accuracy to the third decimal place or

Table 8.1 Charge variables

Variable Purpose

time Determines the length of each time interval (how long each unit lasts).

The value is entered in seconds and hundredths or thousandths of a

second (the maximum value accepted is 655.35 seconds, 65.535 if

thousandths are entered). If time is set to zero or not present no

charges are generated, external charge information is passed through

if received.

start Optional. Sets the initial unit level. Enter a value between 0 and 127

whole units. If you want to use a flat rate, set the desired number of

units here and set the wait to 255 to turn off the time interval.

wait Optional. Determines the delay after which charge generation begins.

Once this time has elapsed, charge impulses are sent in the interval de-

termined with time. Enter a value between 0 and 254 seconds. 255 de-

activates the charge pulse. In this case, the time variable is ignored.

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 102CELLX 16.2

for fractions such as tenths of a cent. This allows for greater flexibility in the

transmission of charges to terminal devices. In order to make use of this option,

connected devices must support “AOC-D Currency”. In the current version, this option

is only available for the DSS1 protocol.

A multiplication factor can be specified for received or generated charges.

During the charge generation process, each charge unit is multiplied by a preset factor.

This factor appears in the mapping entry after the time and start/wait variables

(MapAllsrc=dst mode time start/wait*factor).

Each unit, for example, can be converted to 12 cents. The following example illustrates

the use of this feature.

In this example, all received charge units are multiplied by 12 and passed on. If AOC-Currency

is set on the internal port, each unit appears as 12 cents. The multiplication factor is also used

to implement two new charge models:

If the factor value exceeds 128, this marks the use of an initial toll-free phase followed

by retroactive charge generation.

If the multiplication factor is set to 255, a “minute price” is used in place of the time

variable.

8.2 Online traffic monitor

The Online Traffic Monitor allows you to collect and monitor statistics and call detail records

(CDRs). The following functions are possible with this feature package:

ASR calculation

Generation of CDRs

Generation of online CDRs using e-mail

8.2.1 ASR calculation and resetting statistic values and counters

When these functions are configured in the pabx.cfg file, the following statistic values are

calculated for the entire system at a defined time and are copied into a file in the following

order:

Day and time of entry

System name

Number of connected calls followed by the number of total calls in parentheses

Number of minutes termintated

ASR1: ratio of total calls to connected calls disconnected by the A party

ASR(ext): external ASR for the traffic source

ASR(int): internal ASR for the CELLX

ACD: average call duration

The following example shows how the statistics appear in the file into which they are copied.

Example 8.3 Charge model

...

MapAll1=91 1 128/255*12

...

Example 8.4 Statistics file

26.10.04-00:00:00,iGATE810000: Calls: 19351 (29716) - Minutes: 46647 - ASR1:

65.12% - ASR(ext): 65.12% - ASR(int): 65.30% - ACD: 144.63s

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 103CELLX 16.2

Set the time using the following syntax: <hh:mm>. If ?? appears instead of a specified hour

(for example ??:mm), the ASR is written into the asr.log file once every hour.

You can set <day> to apply for days of the week or for one specific day of the month as fol-

lows:

Use a bitmask to set the weekdays on which the configuration applies here. The daymap ap-

pears in the following order: HoSaFrThWeTuMoSu. For example, enter 00000001 if the con-

figuration is to apply every Sunday.

To set the configuration to apply on one specific day every month, enter the day of the month

followed by a full stop. For example, enter 15. if the configuration is to apply on the 15th of

every month.

If the configuration is to apply every day, do not set <day>.

8.2.1.1 Saving and sending statistics

The statistics are copied into a specified file. This information can also be sent to an e-mail or

SMS recipient. The following syntax must be used:

StatisticTime=/data/asr.log <hh:mm> <day>

StatisticTime=/data/asr.log <hh:mm> <day> @<email address>

StatisticTime=/data/asr.log <hh:mm> <day> @SMS<mobile number>

In the following example, the system’s statistic values are saved every Wednesday into the file

asr.log and sent to an e-mail account.

In the following example, the system’s statistic values are saved at midnight on the first of

every month into the file asr.log and sent to an SMS recipient.

Do not configure both StatisticTimeReset and StatisticTime or StatisticTimeReset and Statis-

ticCounter together.

Example 8.5 Saving and sending statistics 1

StatisticTime=/data/asr.log 00:00 00001000 @info@teles.de

Example 8.6 Saving and sending statistics 2

StatisticTime=/data/asr.log 00:00 01. @SMS01234567890

Do not configure both StatisticTimeReset and StatisticTime together.

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 104CELLX 16.2

8.2.1.2 Saving statistics

The statistics are copied into a specified file and the counters (A-F) are reset. The following

syntax must be used:

StatisticTimeReset=/data/asr.log <hh:mm> <day>

In the following example, statistics will be saved every hour on the hour of every day and the

statistic counters will be reset to 0.

In the following example, the system’s statistic values are saved at noon on the 15th of every

month into the file asr.log.

8.2.1.3 Resetting statistic counters

The following setting in the pabx.cfg resets the statistic counters and unblocks the controller

group. The following syntax must be used:

ResetCounter=<port> <hh:mm> <day> or

ResetCounter=<LAIN> <hh:mm> <day>

Up to five entries for as many groups and/or times are possible. Bear in mind that StatisticTim-

eReset must be inactive to avoid repetition. The mapping to a LAIN requires that in the

pabx.cfg file, the CHADDR parameter is added to the Subscriber line, to change the con-

troller definition to the SIM card’s LAIN.

In the following example the counters will reset for LAIN group 26211 every day at midnight,

for the group 26212 only once on the first day of the month, and for 26213 each Saturday

at 8:00pm.

Example 8.7 Saving statistics 1

StatisticTimeReset=/data/asr.log ??:00

Example 8.8 Saving statistics 2

StatisticTimeReset=/data/asr.log 12:00 15.

Do not configure both StatisticTimeReset and StatisticTime or StatisticTimeReset

and StatisticCounter together.

Example 8.9 Resetting statistic counters

ResetCounter = 26211 00:00 11111111

ResetCounter = 26212 00:00 01.

ResetCounter = 26213 20:00 01000000

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 105CELLX 16.2

8.2.2 Generating and retrieving CDRs

With the Log and failedlog commands, you save CDRs and unconnected calls in the CELLX.

For these parameters (Log and failedlog), a folder and file name must always be specified

after the equal sign. The function is not active (no data is recorded) until a file name is spec-

ified.

The service indicator listed in the call log and missed calls list describes the type of connection

as a four digit hexadecimal number. The coding is conducted according to the 1TR6 standard.

A few frequently used values are listed below.

Do not configure both StatisticTimeReset and StatisticCounter together.

Example 8.10 Generating and retrieving CDRs

Log=/data/cdr.log

failedlog=/data/failed.log

With recording of files, system maintenance increases. You have to be sure to download or

delete files and ensure that there is enough disk space left on the hard drive.

Table 8.2 Service indicator list

Service indicator Description

0101 ISDN-telephony 3.1 kHz

0102 analog telephony

0103 ISDN-telephony 7 kHz

0200 Fax group 2

0202 Fax group 3

0203 Data via modem

0400 Telefax group 4

0500 SMS or BTX (64 kbps)

0700 Data transfer 64 kbps

1001 Video telephone – audio 3.1 kHz

1002 Video telephone – audio 7 kHz

1003 Video telephone – video

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 106CELLX 16.2

For detailed information on how to automatically divide the files (for example on a daily basis),

please refer to the Chapter 5.2.1.2 Log files.

8.2.2.1 Call log

The following entry in the pabx.cfg configuration file activates the capability to generate

CDRs in the CELLX:

Log=/data/cdr.log

The cdr.log file is stored in the data directory. New entries are always added to the end of the

file. The file is open only during editing.

Each line represents an outgoing call with the following information separated by commas:

Table 8.3 Call log entries

Column Description

0Version

1Start time (format DD.MM.YY-hh.mm.ss)

2End time (format DD.MM.YY-hh.mm.ss)

3Source. The following format applies: [node number:automatically set internal

channel number]

4Destination. The following format applies: [node number:automatically set in-

ternal channel number]

5IMSI

6IP logging signaling: RTP

7Audio codec used

8Frame size

9Service indicator (please see Chapter 8.2.2 Generating and retrieving CDRs)

10 Call duration

11 Cause values

12 Charge from the public line (in units)

13 Charge generated from the system (in units)

14 Cell ID

15 RSSI

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 107CELLX 16.2

Sample log file

The example below shows a sample log file.

Differentiating between ports in the same trunk group

To differentiate between ports with the same number in the CDRs, a specific node number

must be defined. You can expand the subscriber configuration line with the keyword

NODE[<num>] for this purpose. <num> can be a string of between 1 and 15 characters:

Subscriber<xx>=... NODE[<num>]

In the below formula, <num> consists of a four-digit number that is included in the CDR.

Example 8.11 Sample log file

V1,25.11.09-10:16:20,25.11.09-

10:16:27,[0000:01]9,[0006:01]111,123456789123451,,,,0102,7,1f,0,,3663,10

V1,25.11.09-10:35:16,25.11.09-

10:35:26,[0000:01]9,[0004:01]111,123456789123452,,,,0102,10,1f,0,3,38922,14

V1,25.11.09-10:38:30,25.11.09-

10:38:41,[0000:01]9,[0004:01]111,123456789123453,,,,0102,11,90,0,3,38922,14

Example 8.12 Differentiating between ports in the same trunk group (CDR entry)

V1,25.11.09-10:16:20,25.11.09-

10:16:27,[0000:01]9,[0006:01]111,

12345678912345

1,,,,0102,7,1f,0,,3663,10

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 108CELLX 16.2

The following example shows the pabx.cfg configuration file changed according to the for-

mula.

Differentiating between SIM cards

The CDR can contain the IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity), which identifies each

SIM card used.

Example 8.13 Differentiating between ports in the same trunk group (pabx.cfg entry)

...

Subscriber00=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0001]

Subscriber01=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0002]

Subscriber02=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0003]

Subscriber03=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0004]

Subscriber04=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0005]

Subscriber05=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0006]

Subscriber06=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0007]

Subscriber07=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0008]

Subscriber08=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0009]

Subscriber09=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0010]

Subscriber10=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0011]

Subscriber11=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0012]

Subscriber12=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0013]

Subscriber13=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0014]

Subscriber14=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0015]

Subscriber15=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0016]

...

Example 8.14 Differentiating between SIM cards (CDR entry)

V1,25.11.09-10:35:16,25.11.09-

10:35:26,[0000:01]9,[0004:01]111,123456789123451,,,,0102,10,1f,0,3,38922,14

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 109CELLX 16.2

The following example shows the pabx.cfg configuration file changed according to the for-

mula.

Activating peer data for VoIP calls

To generate a VoIP-call CDR entry that includes IP addresses for the remote device’s signaling

and voice data, audio codec and frame size, the entry VoipIpLogging=Yes must be included

in the VoIP profile. If the entry also contains the mobile controller’s IMSI, it will appear before

the IP addresses.

Example 8.15 Differentiating between SIM cards (pabx.cfg entry)

...

Subscriber00=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,IMSI,SIM24] CHADDR

ALARM NEXT

Subscriber01=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,IMSI,SIM24] CHADDR

ALARM NEXT

Subscriber02=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,IMSI,SIM24] CHADDR

ALARM NEXT

Subscriber03=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,IMSI,SIM24] CHADDR

ALARM NEXT

Subscriber04=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,IMSI,SIM24] CHADDR

ALARM NEXT

Subscriber05=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,IMSI,SIM24] CHADDR

ALARM NEXT

Subscriber06=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,IMSI,SIM24] CHADDR

ALARM NEXT

Subscriber07=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,IMSI,SIM24] CHADDR

ALARM NEXT

Subscriber08=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,IMSI,SIM24] CHADDR

ALARM NEXT

Subscriber09=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,IMSI,SIM24] CHADDR

ALARM NEXT

Subscriber10=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,IMSI,SIM24] CHADDR

ALARM NEXT

Subscriber11=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,IMSI,SIM24] CHADDR

ALARM NEXT

Subscriber12=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,IMSI,SIM24] CHADDR

ALARM NEXT

Subscriber13=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,IMSI,SIM24] CHADDR

ALARM NEXT

Subscriber14=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,IMSI,SIM24] CHADDR

ALARM NEXT

...

If you remove the keyword IMSI from the pabx.cfg, you must restart the system.

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 110CELLX 16.2

The following entry shows the route.cfg configuration file changed according to the for-

mula.

The following CDR entry includes IP addresses for signaling and voice data, audio codec and

frame size.

CDRs for callback and two stage calls

In the case of CDR entries for Two stage dialing/Callback calls, the beginning and ending

times for the first call leg is always used as the call time. The call time in seconds appears first

for the first leg, followed by a slash and the connection time for the second leg.

Specific cause values

The CELLX will generate cause values that represent an event, such as exceeding a defined

limit.

Example 8.16 Activating peer data for VoIP calls (route.cfg entry)

[Voip:DF]

VoipDirection=IO

VoipPeerAddress=192.168.0.2

VoipIpMask=0xffffffff

VoipCompression=g729 t38

VoipMaxChan=30

VoipSilenceSuppression=Yes

VoipSignalling=0

VoipTxM=4

VoipIPLogging=Yes

Example 8.17 Activating peer data for VoIP calls (CDR entry)

V1,24.11.09-16:52:20,24.11.09-

16:52:22,[0008:01]401419,[0006:01]IN777,

123456789123451

,172.20.25.103:172.20.25.103,G711a,20,0101,2,10,0,,341

93,11

Example 8.18 CDR entry for callback and two stage calls

V1,24.11.09-17:15:29,24.11.09-

17:15:57,[0002:01]CB,[0008:01]DLA,,172.20.25.103:172.20.25.103,G711a,20,0102,28/

3,90,0,,,

Table 8.4 Specific cause values

Cause value Description

0a One of the following limits has been reached:

Unit limit defined in the port’s subscriber line

0b Maximum call duration assigned via vGATE has been reached.

0c Maximum call duration based on mapping entry settings has been reached.

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 111CELLX 16.2

8.2.2.2 Missed calls list

All incoming calls that are not connected can be recorded in a list to facilitate return calls.

Recording is activated using the failedlog=<name> entry in the pabx.cfg. Specify a file

name, for example failedlog=failed.log. Once this setting is made, recording begins at once.

Each line represents an unaccepted incoming call with the following information separated

by commas.

0d Maximum number of minutes per SIM assignment via vGATE has been

reached.

10, 1f Normal call termination (disconnected by calling party).

To avoid sending these values as the reason for call teardown, translate the cause values to

standard values Chapter 8.14 Changing cause values.

Table 8.4 Specific cause values

Cause value Description

Table 8.5 Failed log entries

Column Description

0Version

1Start time (format DD.MM.YY-hh.mm.ss)

2Source. The following format applies: [node number:automatically set internal

channel number]

3Destination. The following format applies: [node number:automatically set inter-

nal channel number]

4IMSI

5IP logging signaling: RTP

6Audio codec used

7Frame size

8Service indicator (please see Chapter 8.2.2 Generating and retrieving CDRs)

9Cause values

10 Call duration (if the call does not result in an Alerting, the entry will be -1)

11 Number of call attempts

12 Cell ID

13 RSSI

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 112CELLX 16.2

The reason the connection could not be established is specified using DSS1 codes:

91 – (user busy)

ff – call not answered (disconnected by calling party)

When callback with DTMF is configured and no connection is established to the B subscriber,

an entry recording the A subscriber’s connection time is generated in the failed.log file.

The CDR contains the IP addresses for signaling and voice data. The first IP address is the sig-

naling address and the second one is the RTP address.The IMSI is written behind the IP ad-

dresses if the keyword IMSI is defined in the pabx.cfg.

In the case of missed-call entries for Two stage dialing/Callback calls, dur is the connection

time for the first leg.

8.2.2.3 Sending CDRs via e-mail

With an appropriate configuration, you can send corresponding CDRs of outgoing and in-

coming calls as e-mail. Bear in mind that the mail server must be configured in the [Mail] sec-

tion of the pabx.cfg, as described in Chapter 5.2.2 SMTP-client configuration. The sender is

given as cdr and the system’s name appears in the subject box. The text box contains the CDR

Example 8.19 Failed.log file

V1,24.11.09-16:13:08,[0006:01]IN,[0008:01]GSM,123456789123456,,,,0101,92,-

1,1,34193,9

V1,24.11.09-16:33:34,[0006:01]IN,[0008:01]GSM,123456789123456,,,,0101,92,-

1,1,34193,12

V1,24.11.09-16:35:19,[0006:01]IN,[0008:01]GSM,123456789123456,,,,0101,92,-

1,1,34193,11

V1,24.11.09-16:35:59,[0006:01]IN,[0008:01]GSM,123456789123456,,,,0101,92,-

1,1,34193,11

V1,24.11.09-16:37:29,[0006:01]IN,[0008:01]GSM,123456789123456,,,,0101,92,-

1,1,34193,11

V1,24.11.09-

16:39:17,[0006:01]IN,[0008:01]GSM,123456789123456,,,,0101,ff,7,1,34193,11

Example 8.20 Failed.log entry 1

V1,24.11.09-

16:39:17,[0006:01]IN,[0008:01]GSM,123456789123456,,,,0101,ff,7,1,34193,11

Example 8.21 Failed.log entry 2

V1,24.11.09-16:52:20,24.11.09-

16:52:22,[0008:01]401419,[0006:01]IN777,262032441017556,172.20.25.103:172.20.25.

103,G711a,20,0101,2,10,0,,34193,11

Example 8.22 Failed.log entry 3

V1,25.11.09-14:11:10,[0002:01]CB,DLA,,,,,0102,11,14,1,,

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 113CELLX 16.2

information according to the format for the entry in Log=/data/cdr.log @<account> @<do-

main>. A space must appear between cdr.log and @<account>; @<domain> is optional. You

can also send CDR entries via e-mail to an e-mail recipient.

Enter an @ sign to send each CDR entry as e-mail:

Log=/data/cdr.log @<e-mail account>@<domain>

If you enter a ! the entire cdr.log will be sent as an e-mail attachment:

Log=/data/cdr.log !<e-mail account>@<domain>

8.3 Ported number screening

Ported number screening is a very useful functionality to avoid high routing costs for numbers

that have been ported to another network operator.

Number portabilty refers to the ability to transfer either an existing fixed-line or mobile tele-

phone number to another network operator. This way telecommunications subscribers can

change operators without having to change their telephone numbers. Routing ported num-

bers, however, can become very cost intensive due to differences in tariffs.

With ported number screening, an external database is queried to find out if a number has

been ported. Either use the iMNP for querying the external database or query the database

directly. The iMNP is a proxy that remembers the database information for a defined period

of time and renews the query to the external database only after that period has passed. Since

every query to the external database costs money, the iMNP helps to reduce querying costs.

The qery result is used in a routing to route the call via the right network operator.

To implement ported number screening, make sure to meet the system requirements which

are:

An active license for number portability.

An iMNP server or another appropriate server.

Also ensure to adjust your configuration:

To connect to the number portability database, you must set the entries described in

Chapter 5.2.3 Number portability settings.

Configure your route.cfg file to activate ported number screening:

DTMFWaitDial=<sec>

Set the time that the gateway waits for additional digits.

MapAll<num>=|$<prefix><num><<<count>

Enable digit collection (pipe symbol) and collect up to the number of digits that is

specified under count. Add the dollar sign to search the routing table again. Prefix the

number with a freely chosen prefix to prepare it for sending to the database.

MapAll<prefix>=|D@<num><<01

Send the prefixed number to the database. Make sure that the prefix used here matches

the above prefix.

MapAllQN<query result>=<controller>

Map the query result to the respective controller. The query result consists of the LAIN

and the number including the country code. Do not forget to also configure routings

for numbers that haven’t been found in the database or that do not exist and also

provide a routing when the server does not respond in a defined period of time.

In the following example, 14 digits are collected (11 digits plus $ph) and a maximum time of

5 seconds is waited for each digit. Every incoming call with a leading digit of 0 results in an

iMNP query. The SIM card’s LAIN is used instead of controller numbers. All numbers that

come back from the iMNP with the LAIN for Carrier_1 (26211) are then routed through

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 114CELLX 16.2

Carrier_1’s SIM card. The same applies for Carrier_2 (26212), Carrier_3 (26213) and Carrier_4

(26214). Numbers that the iMNP sends back as non-existing (00000) are rejected. Numbers

that may exist but are not found in the database (99999) are routed as they come in (normal).

If the iMNP does not respond within two seconds (D@0), the call is routed as it comes in,

whether it is ported or not.

8.4 Digit collection (enblock/overlap receiving)

This function makes it possible to collect up to 24 digits and transmit calls when a specific

number of digits has been dialed. The entire call number is required for the call to be set up

with a mobile phone or the mobile gateway. Since most numbers have a uniform number of

digits, the mobile gateway can collect digits when calls enter the gateway in overlap mode.

Digit collection occurs through the following mapping command:

MapAll<direct>=|<num><<<digits>

The | (pipe) signifies that the following digits will be collected before they are transmitted, and

<digits> is the total number of the port digits and the digits of the called party number. This

figure can range between 00 and 24 and must be entered in double digits. The parameter

DTMFWaitDial defines the number of seconds the system waits between the individual digits

(default 5). Please bear in mind that you can configure a maximum of 11 digits in the first part

of the command and 19 (including a special character, for example #) in the second. The call

will be forwarded as soon as the specified number of digits has been dialed or a time-out limit

has been reached.

Example 8.23 Ported number screening

DTMFWaitDial=5

MapAll0=|$ph0<<14

MapAllph=|D@0<<01

MapAllQN26211=26211

MapAllQN26212=26212

MapAllQN26213=26213

MapAllQN26214=26214

MapAllQN00000=&81

MapAllQN99999=$normal

MapAllD@0=$normal1

; not in Database

;Carrier_1

MapAllnormal0151=262110151

MapAllnormal0160=262110160

MapAllnormal0170=262110170

MapAllnormal0171=262110171

MapAllnormal0175=262110175

;Carrier_2

MapAllnormal0152=262120152

MapAllnormal0162=262120162

MapAllnormal0172=262120172

MapAllnormal0173=262120173

MapAllnormal0174=262120174

;Carrier_3

MapAllnormal0155=262130155

MapAllnormal0163=262130163

MapAllnormal0177=262130177

MapAllnormal0178=262130178

;Carrier_4

MapAllnormal0159=262140159

MapAllnormal0176=262140176

MapAllnormal0179=262140179

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 115CELLX 16.2

The following example shows a call with the prefix 01555. The | (pipe) signifies that the fol-

lowing digits will be collected before they are transmitted. The 14 at the end is the sum of

the port digits and the digits of the called party number (for example |#20=3,

01555899666=11, 3+11=14).

8.5 Rejecting data calls and specified numbers

This chapter describes the configuration options for exclusion of data calls, prefixes, or call

numbers from the routing process.

8.5.1 Blacklist routing

The system will reject all calls directly if the MapAll entry contains the keyword & followed by

the two-digit cause value (see ETS 300 102-1).

MapAll<direct>=&<cause>

In the following example, all calls to the number 004915551234 and all service calls with the

prefix 0180 are rejected with a busy signal. All other calls are sent to the VoIP profile DF.

8.5.2 Whitelist routing

The following entries enable exclusion of specific OADs or trunk groups:

Restrict<ns>=<pl>

MapAll<pl>=&<cause>

Example 8.24 Digit collection

...

MapAll01555=|#2001555<<14

...

DTMFWaitDial=5

...

A maximum of 5000 MapAll entries per time zone can be defined. For more than 5000 en-

tries, please use the iMNP.

Example 8.25 Blacklist routing

MapAll015551234=&91

MapAll004915551234=&91

MapAll0180=&91

MapAll0=40DF:0

...

MapAll9=40DF:9

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 116CELLX 16.2

NS refers to the internal controller number and the call’s origination address.

In the following example, the numbers 12345 and 12346 connected to the PBX at port 10

cannot make any international calls. All national calls are sent to the VoIP profile DF and all

local calls are sent to the PSTN.

In the following example, all incoming calls from the mobile port trunk groups 26212 and

26213 are rejected with a busy signal.

8.5.3 Rejecting calls with ISDN bearer capability data

ISDN data calls can be handled differently from voice calls depending on the configuration of

the call types DATA or VOICE. This setting is especially interesting for VoIP or GSM calls.

MapAll<direct>=&<cause> <mode>

A maximum of 1000 Restrict entries per time zone can be defined.

Example 8.26 Whitelist routing 1

Restrict1012346=int

MapAllint00=&91

MapAllint0=40DF:0

MapAllint1=91

...

MapAllint9=90

Example 8.27 Whitelist routing 2

Restrict26212=not

Restrict26213=not

MapAllnot=&91

Analog modm connections are not included in this configuration, as they generally do not

have a specified bearer capability.

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 117CELLX 16.2

In the following example, all ISDN data calls are rejected with the cause value AA (switching

equipment congestion). All calls with the prefix 0170 are routed to the mobile trunk group

26211 and all other calls are routed through VoIP.

8.5.4 Specific routing of data calls via VoIP

In the ISDN network, data calls have a special service type. When an ISDN PBX is connected

to a VoIP network, it must continue to work without any problems (for example PBX remote

maintenance calls or ISDN terminal adapter). In the case of VoIP, a specific RTP payload type

is used: trp, ccd or gnx64.

In the following example, two VoIP profiles are configured, so that all calls are routed, regard-

less of whether they are data calls or voice over IP calls. The first one is for outgoing voice calls

and all calls from VoIP to ISDN. The second profile is exclusively for outgoing data calls, so

that signaling consists solely of clear mode in SDP.

8.6 CLIP and CLIR

8.6.1 Routing CLIP and CLIR calls

This function allows you to route calls with Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) dif-

ferently from calls with Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR). For example, all CLIP calls

can be rejected, so that only calls that do not present the calling number or calls without a

calling party number (for example analog) are transmitted through the CELLX.

Example 8.28 Rejecting calls with ISDN bearer capability data

MapAll0=&aa DATA

...

MapAll9=&aa DATA

...

MapAll0170=262110170

MapAll0=40DF:0

...

MapAll9=40DF:9

Example 8.29

MapAll0=40DATA:0 DATA

...

MapAll9=40DATA:9 DATA

MapAll0=|40DF:0<<24

...

MapAll9=|40DF:9<<24

Restrict40=In

MapAllIn=10

[Voip:DF]

VoipDirection=IO

...

VoipCompression=g711a g729 trp t38

...

[Voip:DATA]

VoipDirection=Out

...

VoipCompression=trp

VoipECE=No

...

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 118CELLX 16.2

Use the following configuration to define the various routing methods.

InsertCLIR=On activates this mode. 01 is the service indicator for telephony (analog and ISDN)

and is used to differentiate these calls from remote administration calls. Restrict9=OK 01

means that all telephony calls without a calling number are put through. Restrict|9=OK 01

means that all CLIR telephony calls are put through. Restrict90=FAIL 01 means that all CLIP

telephony calls are rejected with No Channel Available as rejection cause when they are

mapped to MapInFAIL=&aa.

8.6.2 Routing calls without CLIR

Use this function to bypass CLIR for calls through the defined mobile port. The following con-

figuration in pabx.cfg activates this function.

8.6.2.1 Setting CLIR

Setting a hash (#) in front of a call number makes it possible to suppress the presentation of

the origination number of calls regardless of how the call comes into the system.

The following syntax is used: MapAll<num>=#<port><num>.

The following example shows an appropriate configuration. With this entry, all calls begin-

ning with 00491555 are sent to the port with the address 22 and the presentation of the

number is restricted.

Example 8.30 Routing CLIP and CLIR calls

...

InsertCLIR=On

...

Restrict9=OK 01

Restrict|9=OK 01

Restrict90=FAIL 01

...

MapInOK00491555=2200491555

MapInFAIL=&aa

...

Example 8.31 Routing calls without CLIR

Subscriber<xx>=...GSM[...,!CLIR]...

When this function is configured, the SIM’s telephone number (and not originating telephone)

is always transmitted to the B subscriber.

Example 8.32 Setting CLIR

MapAll00491555=#2200491555

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 119CELLX 16.2

8.6.2.2 Setting CLIP

Setting an exclamation point (!) in front of a call number makes it possible to force the pre-

sentation of the origination number of calls regardless of how the call comes into the system.

The following syntax is used: MapAll<num>=!<port><num>

The following example shows an appropriate configuration. With this entry, all calls begin-

ning with 004930 are sent to the port with the address 9 and the presentation of the origi-

nation number is allowed.

8.7 Conversion of call numbers

The conversion of call numbers makes it possible, for example, to implement number porta-

bility or to redirect calls when the user can be reached at another number. In the following

mapping command, the call number 015550123456 is changed to 015559876543 and sent

to the mobile channel (MapAll...=20..)

The following example presents an alternative, in which the routing file is searched through

again after conversion of the call number to determine the route for the prefix 01555. Please

bear in mind that you can configure a maximum of 1499 mapping entries with no more than

11 digits in the first part of the command and 19 in the second.

8.8 Overwriting OAD

In some cases where the OAD is not transmitted or shall for other reasons be overwritten, the

following parameter can be used to send another OAD:

Restrict<port>=<OAD to be sent> 15 or

Restrict<port><original OAD>=<OAD to be sent> 15

For PRI ports only: extend this parameter by a text in quotation marks to transmit a display

info element in a PRI or SIP call. If supported by the receiving telephone, the content of the

display field is displayed in addition or instead of the OAD.

Restrict<port>=<OAD to be sent> 15 “display field“ or

Restrict<port><original OAD>=<OAD to be sent> 15 “display field“

Example 8.33 Setting CLIP

MapAll004930=!9004930

Example 8.34 Conversion of call numbers 1

MapAll015550123456=20015559876543

Example 8.35 Conversion of call numbers 2

MapAll015550123451=$Reception

MapAll015550123452=$Reception

MapAll015550123453=$Reception

MapAllReception=015559876543

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 120CELLX 16.2

In the following example, the text “Teles Marketing” and / or the OAD 456 are displayed to

the called person for calls that have been received via port 10.

8.9 Setting number type in OAD/DAD

In some cases it may be necessary to set a specific number type for the OAD or DAD. There

are different methods for the various interfaces. The following number types can be set.

OAD

Use the following entry to set a specific number type in the OAD:

Restrict<port><num>=<type> 15

For the national and international types, remove the 0(s) at the beginning of the number:

Restrict<port>0=n 15

Restrict<port>00=i 15

In the following example, the bit is set in the caller’s origination number for a call via BRI con-

troller 01.

You can set a u (unknown type of number) in the Restrict entry to change transmission of the

national/international bit to 0 or 00 at the beginning of the OAD. As in a mapping entry, the

national/international bit will always appear left of the equal sign as 0 or 00.

Restrict<port>0=u0 15

Restrict<port>00=u00 15

Example 8.36 Overwriting OAD

Restrict10=456 15 “TELES Marketing“

Table 8.6 Number types

Ty p e Description

u Unknown

sSubscriber number

n National number

iInternational number

Example 8.37 Setting number type in OAD 1

Restrict90=n 15

Restrict900=i 15

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 121CELLX 16.2

In the following example, the area code 030 with a 0 at the beginning of the OAD of the

PBX’s extension is set as a digit and transmitted along with the number.

The keyword RestrictR allows you to set a second modification in the OAD in the case of a

redirect.

In the first part of this example, OADs beginning with 030 are changed to 4930.

In the second part of this example, if the call is not connected and a Redirect3 is configured

for the call, the OAD will be changed from 4930 to 004930 as follows.

DAD

Enter one of the four specific number types in the DAD as follows:

MapAll<num>=<port><type><num>

In the case of a VoIP controller, enter the following:

MapAll<num>=<port><voip profile>:<type><num>

The number type will then be defined at the port. For the national and international types,

remove the 0(s) at the beginning of the number:

In the following example, the international bit is set for all calls to Italy (0039) and the number

is transmitted with 39. For the area code 012, the national bit is set and the number is trans-

mitted with 12.

Example 8.38 Setting number type in OAD 2

Restrict10555=u030555 15

Restrict entries are handled from general to specific from top to bottom.

Example 8.39 OAD changed ...

Restrict9030=4930 15

Example 8.40 ... and RestrictR applied

RestrictR4930=004930 15

Example 8.41 Setting number type in DAD 1

MapAll0039=40iG1:i39 VOICE

MapAll012=40iG1:n12 VOICE

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 122CELLX 16.2

In the following example, a 1:1 routing entry for the individual PRI controllers to VoIP appears

in addition to the international flag from PRI to VoIP. A placeholder routing entry is used (in1

or in2), in which the PRI ports are directly assigned to a mapping. Traffic at PRI port 9 is sent

directly to VoIP port 40 with the VoIP profile iG1. Traffic from PRI port 10 is sent to VoIP port

40 with the profile iG2.

8.10 Setting the screening indicator

You can set the screening indicator to define whether the calling-party number sent is spec-

ified as user provided verified and passed or network provided:

User provided verified and passed: v

Network provided: p

In the following Restrict example, the calling party number sent is specified as user provided

verified and passed.

In the following Restrict example, the calling party number sent is specified as network pro-

vided.

If you also want to define a number type (see Chapter 8.9 Setting number type in OAD/DAD),

it must appear in front of the screening indicator:

Example 8.42 Setting number type in DAD 2

Restrict9=in1

Restrict900=i 15

Restrict10=in2

Restrict1000=i 15

MapAllin100=40iG1:i

MapAllin200=40iG2:i

The restrict entries for the individual ports must appear in the following order: placeholder,

OAD international flag, DAD routing with international flag.

Example 8.43 Setting the screening indicator 1

Restrict10=v 15

Example 8.44 Setting the screening indicator 2

Restrict10=p 15

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 123CELLX 16.2

In the following Restrict example, the screening indicator is specified as network provided,

and the number type is international.

Please bear in mind that this entry will not work if you set a minus sign (-) behind Voi-

pOad=<num>.

8.11 Setting a default OAD

Use the Restrict command to set a default origination number (*<oad> 15) when the OAD is

restricted (<num>):

Restrict<port><oad>=*<num> 15

In the following example, 12345 replaces the original OAD. When the destination number

begins with 030, the call is sent through controller 10.

Use the entry Restrict<port><oad>=<num> 15 if digits at the beginning of the OAD are the

only ones to be restricted.

In the following example, the digits 004930 are replaced with 030 followed by the remaining

digits. The destination number begins with 030 and is sent through port 10.

8.12 Setting or removing sending complete byte in setup

In some cases the ISDN or H323 peer system may require this byte for routing, or the byte

may disrupt signaling.

Setting sending complete

The following entry ensures that the Setup includes a Sending Complete:

MapAll<direct>=)<num>

The ) causes inclusion of Sending Complete in the ISDN Setup or in the H323 Setup.

Example 8.45 Setting the screening indicator 3

Restrict10=ip 15

Example 8.46 Setting a default OAD 1

Restrict9=*12345 15

MapAll030=10030

Example 8.47 Setting a default OAD 2

Restrict9004930=030 15

MapAll030=10030

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 124CELLX 16.2

In the following example, all calls beginning with 0 are sent with a Sending Complete to con-

troller 9.

Removing sending complete

The following entry ensures that the Setup never includes a Sending Complete:

MapAll<direct>=(<num>

The ( causes removal of Sending Complete in the ISDN Setup or in the H323 Setup.

In the following example, all calls beginning with 0 are sent without a Sending Complete to

VoIP controller 40. The VoIP profile is DF.

8.12.1 Exclusion from SIM minutes counter

The keyword DDNC (daily duration not counted) will exclude the mapping entry from the

minutes counter:

MapAll<num>=<port><num> DDNC

8.13 Miscellaneous routing methods

In the following scenarios it may occur that some call numbers must be routed with differing

lengths or that some call numbers may require additional number conversion:

Calls without a destination number

Connection to a PBX with an extension prefix

Routing based on the length of the destination number

8.13.1 Routing calls without a destination number

Enter the following configuration in the route.cfg if the CELLX must route calls that come

in without a destination number:

Restrict<port>=<pl>

MapAll<pl><num>=<port><num>

MapAll<pl>=<port>

Example 8.48 Setting sending complete

MapAll0=)90

Example 8.49 Removing sending complete

MapAll0=(40DF:0

Example 8.50 Exclude mapping entry from SIM minutes counter

MapAll030=26212030 DDNC

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 125CELLX 16.2

Incoming calls from the configured port will be assigned a placeholder and then all calls be-

ginning with the placeholder will be routed to the placeholder’s placeholder’s mapping.

In the following example, all calls from controller 9 are routed to controller 10, regardless of

whether a destination number appears in the setup.

8.13.2 Routing calls based on extension prefix or the length of the DAD

To route calls with a DAD differently from those without a DAD, you must activate the block

feature in the pabx.cfg and restart the system:

Block=1

Set all other parameters in the route.cfg. First define the port from which the incoming calls

are to be routed. Incoming calls from the configured port will be assigned a placeholder and

then digit collection will occur for all calls beginning with the placeholder. The $ in the map-

ping entry, followed by the defined placeholder (MMM), causes a second search of the rout-

ing file when the number is complete:

DTMFWaitDial=<sec>

Restrict<port>=<pl>

MapAll<pl>=|$MMM<<98

The second routing-file search is based on the routing entry with the leading placeholder

(MMM):

MapAllMMM<digits>=<dest><digits>

In the following example, digit collection is activated for all calls that come into port 9. Calls

with the destination number 2222 are sent to the VoIP controller with the profile DF and the

destination number is replaced with the SIP account Betty. Calls with the number 3333 are

sent to VoIP with the SIP account Al. All other calls with a destination number are sent to con-

troller 10. Calls without a destination number are sent to the number 12345 at port 10.

Example 8.51 Routing calls without a destination number

Restrict9=pl

MapAllpl=10

Example 8.52 Routing calls based on an extension prefix or on the length of the destination number

DTMFWaitDial=5

Restrict9=pl

MapAllpl=|$MMM<<98

MapAllMMM2222=40DF:Betty

MapAllMMM3333=40DF:Al

MapAllMMM0=100

MapAllMMM1=101

MapAllMMM2=102

MapAllMMM3=103

MapAllMMM4=104

MapAllMMM5=105

MapAllMMM6=106

MapAllMMM7=107

MapAllMMM8=108

MapAllMMM9=109

MapAllMMM=1012345

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 126CELLX 16.2

8.14 Changing cause values

It is possible to group cause values together into a single defined cause value so that rejected

calls can be handled in a specified manner by the switch sending the call to the CELLX. The

following cause value groups can be defined in the pabx.cfg:

Group 0 cause values

All connections that are rejected with a group 0 cause value (0x80-0x8f) can be mapped to a

single cause value by entering TranslateG0Cause=<cau>, whereby <cau> represents a

cause value in hexadecimal form.

Group 1 cause values

All connections that are rejected with a group 1 cause value (0x90-0x9f) can be mapped to a

single cause value by entering TranslateG1Cause=<cau>, whereby <cau> represents a

cause value in hexadecimal form.

Group 2 cause values

All connections that are rejected with a group 2 cause value (0xa0-0xaf) can be mapped to a

single cause value by entering TranslateG2Cause=<cau>, whereby <cau> represents a

cause value in hexadecimal form.

Group 3 cause values

All connections that are rejected with a group 3 cause value (0xb0-0xbf) can be mapped to a

single cause value by entering TranslateG3Cause=<cau>, whereby <cau> represents a

cause value in hexadecimal form.

Translating individual cause values

The following parameter allows you to translate any of these cause values to any other one:

Translate<cause>=<cause>. The values entered must be in hexadecimal notation between

00 and 7f.

Translating SIP causes to ISDN and vice versa

You can define a specific translation from SIP responses (4xx - 6xx) to ISDN cause values and

vice versa. If nothing is set, the translation occurs as described in draft-kotar-sipping-

dss1-sip-iw-01.txt.

Use the following parameter to translate a cause from ISDN to a specific SIP response:

SipCause<ISDN cause>=<SIP Response>

Repeat the entry to initiate an additional translation.

Use the following parameter to translate a cause from SIP to ISDN:

SipEvent<SIP Response>=<ISDN Cause>

The following range of values applies:

400<= <SIP Cause> <=699 (defined in RFC 3261)

0<= <ISDN Cause> <=127 (DSS1 decimal cause number)

8.15 Call forking

The call forking functionality is mostly used to send inbound calls to your PBX extension and

mobile phone simultaneously. Calls can be answered from either the extension or the mobile

phone.

8 Signaling and routing features

Page 127CELLX 16.2

To activate this feature, you need to add two parameters to the route.cfg: GlobalIn and

GlobalOut.

Before adding call forking functionality to your route.cfg, check whether the necessary

mapping of a destination number to a port plus new destination number exists:

MapAll<destinationNumber>=<port><newDestinationNumber>

For routing to a VoIP port, the following syntax is used:

MapAll<destinationNumber>=<voipPort><voipProfile>:<newDestinationNumber>

The parameters destination number and new destination number do not need to be identical.

To activate call forking, add the following entries behind the mappings:

Assign the port plus new destination number to the parameter GlobalIn<int>. You can de-

fine up to 32 different GlobalIn configurations.

GlobalIn<int>=<port><newDestinationNumber> where int >= 1

For VoIP, the following syntax is used:

GlobalIn<int>=<voipPort><voipProfile>:<newDestinationNumber> where int >= 1

Assign the numbers which you want to call simultaneously to the GlobalOut<int> parame-

ter. The integer value is used to map GlobalIn to GlobalOut. You can define up to 32 dif-

ferent GlobalOut configurations.

GlobalOut<int>=<destinationNumber1> <destinationNumber2> where int >= 1

Be aware that for both destination numbers the MapAll parameter needs to be set. This must

be done before the forking.

In this example two mappings exist: calls to the destination number 543211234 are mapped

to the port 10 and the new destination number 543211234. Calls to the destination number

01721234554 are mapped to the port 20 and the new destination number 01721234554.

Before the call is sent out, the system checks the route.cfg for a matching GlobalIn pa-

rameter. A match is found for calls to 10543211234 and calls to this number are sent to

543211234 and 01721234554 simultaneously.

Example 8.53 Call forking

MapAll543211234=10543211234

MapAll01721234554=2001721234554

...

GlobalIn1=10543211234

GlobalOut1=543211234 01721234554

9 Additional VoIP parameters

Page 129CELLX 16.2

You can enter the following additional parameters in the route.cfg to adjust the configu-

ration for improved communication with the VoIP peer.

9.1 Signaling parameters

Table 9.1 Customized parameters: protocol-independent VoIP signaling

Protocol-Independent VoIP Signaling Parameters

VoipComprMaster=<mode>

This parameter defines which side the first matching codec comes from:

Yes: Default. Priority is determined by the order of the system’s parameter list.

No: Priority is determined by the peer.

VoipConnectOnCallProc=<mode>

Enter Yes (default No) to change an H.323 Call Proceeding/Call Progress and Alert, or a SIP 180

or 183, into an H.323 Connect or SIP 200 message. This parameter can be used if an announce-

ment that plays before the Connect requires a Connect on the other side to put through the call.

VoipDad=<num>

The digits/numbers defined here will appear in front of the original DAD as described for the pa-

rameter VoipOad below. If the parameter is to be valid in only one direction, you must also set

the parameter VoipDadIn or VoipDadOut .

VoipDadIn=<string>

Specifies that the parameter VoipDad is for incoming calls only. If this parameter is not set (de-

fault), VoipDad will apply for both directions.

VoipDadOut=<string>

Specifies that the parameter VoipDad is for outgoing calls only. If this parameter is not set (de-

fault), VoipDad will apply for both directions.

VoipDataBypassPayloadType=<num>

Defines the payload type for the RTP packets when the call is sent as a data call. Default 96.

VoIPEarlyT38=<mode>

Enter yes to enable T38 before the call has been connected. Enter no to enable T38 after the call

has been connected. Default yes.

VoIPEarlyVP=<mode>

Activates the vocoder chip caused by an incoming SIP 180 or 183 without sdp. Fax tones coming

from ISDN are already recognized before the connect and can thus prepare or even allow a switch

to T38. Default no.

VoipG72616PayloadType=<num>

Changes the SIP payload type for G.726 16 b/s. Default is 35. A common alternative is one of the

dynamic payload types from 96 to 127.

VoipG72624PayloadType=<num>

Changes the SIP payload type for G.726 24 b/s. Default is 36. A common alternative is one of the

dynamic payload types from 96 to 127.

VoipG72632PayloadType=<num>

Changes the SIP payload type for G.726 32 b/s. Default is 2. A common alternative is one of the dy-

namic payload types from 96 to 127.

VoipG72640PayloadType=<num>

Changes the SIP payload type for G.726 40 b/s. Default is 38. A common alternative is one of the dy-

namic payload types from 96 to 127.

9 Additional VoIP parameters

Page 130CELLX 16.2

VoipHideOadByRemove=<mode>

If Yes is configured and call setup is to VoIP, the OAD will be removed from signaling if presenta-

tion restricted or user-provided, not screened is set in the calling party’s presentation or screening

indicator. No (default) means no change will occur.

NOTE: If the SIP protocol is used, Anonymous will always appear as the account in the From

field. Transmission of the OAD can occur in the P-asserted header.

VoipIgnoreDADType=<mode>

Enter yes to change the DAD type to unknown, for example from international. The type is lost, for

example the leading 00 bit is removed. Default no.

Table 9.1 Customized parameters: protocol-independent VoIP signaling (continued)

Protocol-Independent VoIP Signaling Parameters

9 Additional VoIP parameters

Page 131CELLX 16.2

VoipOad=<num>

In the following examples, the OAD is 5175551212.

The digits/numbers defined here will be transmitted in front of the original OAD. In the following

example, 001 will appear in front of the number 5175551212.

EXAMPLE: VoipOad=001

To transmit only OADs consisting of more digits than those defined, enter a !, followed by the

number of digits, at the end of the entry. If the OAD has more digits, it will be transmitted un-

changed. If it has the same number or fewer digits, only the string in front of the ! will be added

in front of the OAD. In the following example, the digits 0015175551212 will appear::

EXAMPLE: VoipOad=001!10

If a minus (-) is entered, the original OAD will not appear. In the following example, no number

will be transmitted.

EXAMPLE: VoipOad=-

If integers are entered before the minus sign, only the digits entered in front of the minus sign

will be displayed. In the following example, 789 will appear.

EXAMPLE: VoipOad=789-

If an integer is entered after the minus sign, this number of digits will be removed from the be-

ginning of the OAD. In the following example, 517 will be removed from the OAD:

EXAMPLE: VoipOad=-3

If -\ is entered followed by the first part of an OAD, that part will be removed. If the string does

not match, the OAD will be transmitted unchanged. In the following example, only 1212 will be

transmitted.

EXAMPLE: VoipOad=-\517555

To modify the original OAD, enter random<x>, whereby x represents a number of random digits

between 1 and 10 that will appear in the OAD. In the following example, 001 plus 2 random digits

plus the original OAD will appear.

EXAMPLE: VoipOad=001random2

If --\ is entered followed by a part of an OAD (not necessarily the first part), the OAD will not be

transmitted at all. If the string does not match, the OAD will be transmitted unchanged. In the

following example, the OAD is not transmitted.

EXAMPLE: VoipOad=--\555

If -<num>-\ is entered followed by a part of an OAD (not necessarily the first part), the entered

number of digits is cut from the OAD and the remaining OAD is searched for the entered part. If

it is found, the OAD will not be transmitted. If the string does not match, the remaining OAD will

be transmitted.

In the following example, the OAD is not transmitted.

EXAMPLE: VoipOad=-3-\555

In the following example, the remaining OAD 5551212 is transmitted.

EXAMPLE: VoipOad=-3-\444

Enter -\x\y\ to replace the digits x by the digits y. x must be at the beginning of the OAD. x and y

can differ in length.

In the following example, the digits 517 are replaced by the digits 00517.

EXAMPLE: VoipOad=-517\00517\

Enter -\?\y\ to replace any first digits with y. ? is used as a placeholder for one digit. ? and y can

have different lengths.

In the following example, the first three digits are replaced by 00517.

EXAMPLE: VoipOad=-???\00517\

Use a semicolon to concatenate several VoipOad commands. The commands are processed from

left to right.

In the following example, the first three digits are removed from the beginning of the OAD. In the

remaining OAD, the first three digits are replaced by 444. The OAD 4441212 is transmitted.

EXAMPLE: VoipOad=-3;-???\444\

NOTE: If the parameter is to be valid in only one direction, you must also set the parameter

VoipOadIn or VoipOadOut .

VoipOadIn=<string>

Specifies that the parameter VoipOad is for incoming calls only. If this parameter is not set (de-

fault), VoipOad will apply for both directions.

Table 9.1 Customized parameters: protocol-independent VoIP signaling (continued)

Protocol-Independent VoIP Signaling Parameters

9 Additional VoIP parameters

Page 132CELLX 16.2

VoipOadOut=<string>

Specifies that the parameter VoipOad is for outgoing calls only. If this parameter is not set (de-

fault), VoipOad will apply for both directions.

VoipProgress=<int>

For H.323: 0=progress indicator is not transmitted. 1 (default)=progress indicator is transmitted.

2=address complete message is transmitted. 3=call proceeding message type changed in alerting

message type.

For SIP: 0=183 response ignored and not sent. 1=183 response changed to a progress message

with inband-info-available at the ISDN interface (default). 2=183 response changed to an address

complete message at the ISDN interface. 3=183 response changed to an alerting at the ISDN in-

terface.

VoipSignalCLIR=<string>

When the configured string appears at the beginning of the OAD and the parameter

VoipHideOadByRemove is set, the OAD is removed from signaling, regardless of the presentation

bits in the calling party field. If the parameter VoipHideOadByRemove is not set (default), the pre-

sentation bits are set at presentation restricted (CLIR) if <string> is -. If the string matches the first

digits of the OAD and it comes in with CLIP, the call will be sent to VoIP using CLIR. If the call

comes in with CLIR, the string will be added to the beginning of the OAD and CLIR will be re-

moved in the signaling.

VoipSingleTcpSession=<mode>

Enter Yes to send all outgoing VoIP connections in a single TCP session. Enter No (default) for an

extra TCP session for each VoIP connection.

VoipSuppressInbandInfoAvailableIndicatorInCallProceeding=<mode>

Enter yes to send or receive the Progress Indicator in the Q.931 Call Proceeding message. Default

no.

VoipTrpPayloadType=<num>

Defines the payload type for data calls when trp (transparent/clear mode) is used as codec in Voip-

Compression=<list>. Default is 56. A common value is 102.

Table 9.2 Customized parameters: H.323 signaling

H.323 Signaling Parameters

VoipCanOverlapSend=<mode>

Enter off to deactivate overlap sending during setup (default on).

VoipH245Transport=<int>

This option determines the H.245 offer. 0 (default)=all signaling variants are offered; 1=FastStart

only; 2=H.245 tunneling only; 3=extra session.

VoipMapAddressType=<mode>

For calls from PSTN to VoIP only. Enter yes to change the 00 at the beginning of a number to

international and 0 to national.

VoipMCinRLC= <mode>

Enter Yes to cause the system to send the media channel capability in the reverse logical channel

parameters as part of the H.245 negotiation (default No).

VoipRejectIncomingNonMatchingFaststart=<mode>

Setup will be rejected if the RTP codecs offered for incoming H.323 call setup with Faststart ele-

ments do not match those configured in the parameter VoipCompression. Default No.

VoipRestrictTCS=<mode>

If Yes is entered, the response in the H.323 tunneling terminal capability set contains only the co-

decs offered by the peer and not those configured in the system. Default No.

Table 9.1 Customized parameters: protocol-independent VoIP signaling (continued)

Protocol-Independent VoIP Signaling Parameters

9 Additional VoIP parameters

Page 133CELLX 16.2

VoipService=0x<service indicator>

This parameter sets the ISDN bearer capability. For example, it can be used for calls coming from

VoIP with the bearer capability data. You can define the service indicator as it is in the 1TR6 code:

101 - ISDN 3,1kHz

102 - analog

103 - ISDN 7kHz

201 - Fax 2

202 - Fax 3

203 - Fax 4

700 - Data

Normally 101 is used. You can send another value to a switch that wants to handle VoIP calls dif-

ferently from PSTN calls.

EXAMPLE:

VoipService=0x101

VoipSetupAck=<int>

1=setup acknowledge is transmitted; 0= setup acknowledge is not transmitted; 2 (default)

=transmitted with H.323 information.

Table 9.3 Customized parameters: SIP signaling

SIP Signaling Parameters

VoipAckWithSdp=<mode>

Enter yes to send the SDP content in the SIP ack message. Default no.

VoipAllow=<list>

The allow header shows the supported methods and can be set here.

EXAMPLE: VoipAllow=INVITE,BYE

The default setting includes the following:

INVITE,ACK,CANCEL,BYE,UPDATE,REGISTER,PRACK,INFO,NOTIFY,REFER

It may be necessary to remove some of these entries for some peers.

VoipAllowTlsAoc99=<yes/no>

If the AOC99 information (charging information) is sent within a SIP-info-message and this pa-

rameter is set to yes, the AOC information is evaluated. The default value is yes.

VoipAngleBracketIsReserved=<yes/no>

Enter yes to to replace < or > in the SIP uri by their ASCII encoding %3c or %3e. Is needed when

a peer does not accept < or >. Default no.

VoipContact=<account@domain>

Used for the Contact field in Sip-Invite and Sip-Response messages.

VoipContactParam=<string>

Sets additional header parameters in the contact field.

VoipDadSource=<int>

SIP only: defines the field from which field the called party number coming from SIP is to be taken:

0 = URL or URI in the Invite request that contains only digits, otherwise the To: field is used (de-

fault)

1 = To: field

2 = Remote-Party-ID with party = called

4 = URL or URI in the Invite request that can also contain letters

8 = Diversion header (in case a redirect number is to be used as destination number)

Table 9.2 Customized parameters: H.323 signaling (continued)

H.323 Signaling Parameters

9 Additional VoIP parameters

Page 134CELLX 16.2

VoipDelayDisc=<mode>

Yes (default) delays confirmation transmission during call teardown. That means the release tone

is audible when the peer tears down the call.

NOTE: For versions 13.0c or lower: To improve ASR, we recommend that you set this parameter

to Yes if you use the parameter VoipMaxChan.

VoipInfoSamOnly=<mode>

This parameter determines the behavior in the case of overlap sending (VoipOverlap must also be

set). Yes means that the contents of the SubsequentNumber field in info method will be attached

to the URI’s available digits or to the invite message’s To field. No (default) means that the digit

contents of the SubsequentNumber field will be used.

VoipOadSource=<int>

SIP only: defines the field from which field the calling party number coming from SIP is to be tak-

en:

0 = From: field (default)

1 = Remote-Party-ID

2 = P-Preferred-Identity

4 = P-Asserted-Identity

8= Display field

NOTE: If 2 or 4 are entered, the number in the field must begin with tel:

Going to SIP, the OAD is written in the following field:

0 = From: field (default)

1 = Remote-Party-ID (if VoipOwnAddress is not set)

For the fields P-Preferred-Identity and P-Asserted-Identity, please check the corresponding param-

eters. If the number is sent with CLIR to SIP, the From: field contains anonymous@anonymous.in-

valid. If the number has to appear in the From: Field, the decimal value of the parameter must be

increased by 8.

VoipOverlap=<mode>

SIP only. Enter yes to activate signaling with overlap sending, as per draft-zhang-sipping-overlap-

01.txt. That means digit collection is no longer necessary in the routing when the digets come

from ISDN with overlap sending. When this parameter is active, VoipPrack is automatically set to

yes. Default is no.

VoipOwnAddress=<account@domain>

Used for the From field in Sip-Invite and Sip-Response messages. If only the domain is entered,

the origination address (for example from ISDN) followed by an @ sign will automatically be set

at the beginning.

If the keyword IMSI appears in the parameter and the call is from GSM to VoIP, the SIM cards IMSI

is transmitted in the FROM field:

EXAMPLE: VoipOwnAddress=IMSI@CELLX01

VoipOwnDisplay=<string>

The entry is sent as Display Name in the From Field in SIP transmissions. The keyword MSN causes

the calling telephone’s MSN to be transmitted as Display Name. The keyword DSP causes the ISDN

display information element to be transmitted as Display Name. Default: no setting.

Example: From: "John" <sip:493011111@teles.de>

VoipP-Asserted-Identity=<string>

Sets the P-Asserted-Identity field in the SIP invite message. The following settings are possible to-

ward SIP:

* The OAD coming from ISDN is transmitted.

<string> The defined string is transmitted

A combination of both is possible.

Examples: 030* or tel:* or sip:user@carrier.de

Table 9.3 Customized parameters: SIP signaling (continued)

SIP Signaling Parameters

9 Additional VoIP parameters

Page 135CELLX 16.2

VoipP-Preferred-Identity=<string>

Sets the P-Preferred-Identity field in the SIP invite message. The following settings are possible to-

wards SIP:

* The OAD coming from ISDN is transmitted.

<string> The defined string is transmitted.

A combination of both is possible.

Examples: 030* or tel:* or sip:user@carrier.de

VoipPrack=<mode>

SIP only: Enter yes to activate Provisional Response Messages in the signaling, as per RFC 3262

"Reliability of Provisional Responses in the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)". Default is no.

VoipSdpProxy=<mode>

SIP only. Enter yes to activate proxy mode for SDP signaling for SIP to SIP calls. The parameters

for RTP signaling will be forwarded from one leg to the next and RTP is not handled by the system.

Default is no.

VoipSipStatusIncompatibleCodec=<reject cause>

An INVITE request is rejected if the codec that is sent with this INVITE does not match the codecs

that have been defined in the VoIP profile. The INVITE is rejected with the reject cause given in

this parameter, as per RFC 3261 (default 415).

VoipUseMaxPTime=<mode>

SIP only. Enter yes to set the field mptime (max packet time) with the values set in VoipTxm

(ptime). Default no.

The parameter VoipUseMaxPTime is used when VoipUseMPTime is 0, 1 or 2.

VoipUseMPTime=<int>

This parameter is used to configure packet time signaling in SDP:

0 = set attribute ptime with each individual codec description (default).

1 = set attribute ptime once as the first attribute after the m- line (media type).

2 = set attribute mptime (multiple ptime) once as the first attribute with the list of the codecs’

corresponding ptimes.

3 = remove attribute ptime or mptime in SDP signaling.

The parameter VoipUseMaxPTime is used when VoipUseMPTime is 0, 1 or 2.

VoipUserAgent=<mode>/<string>

When Yes is set (default), the system type and software version is used in the SIP user agent head-

er. Enter no to deactivate this setting, or enter a string to change it.

VoipUtuFormat=<int>

Enter 1 to transfer ISDN user to user information to SIP and vice versa in the following special for-

mat: A separate contents block is created (using boundaries) or evaluated that contains the ISDN

user to user info. Default is 0, which transports the ISDN user to user information in a SIP header

field "User-to-User:", according to the recommendation in http://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-

johnston-sipping-cc-uui-09.

Table 9.3 Customized parameters: SIP signaling (continued)

SIP Signaling Parameters

9 Additional VoIP parameters

Page 136CELLX 16.2

9.2 Registrar parameters

The following parameters can be used in the VoIP profile when the SIP agent wants to register

with the CELLX.

The following example creates an account for a user agent with the username 130 and pass-

word test130. Authentication occurs with the procedure www.

Table 9.4 Customized parameters: location server

Location Server Parameters

VoipAuth=<mode>

Defines the authentication procedure www (default) or proxy.

VoipExpires=<sec>

Defines the maximum number of seconds the agent’s registration applies (default 3600).

VoipOwnPwd=<string>

Defines the password the agent uses to register.

VoipOwnUser=<string>

Defines the username the agent uses to register.

Example 9.1 Registrar parameters

MapAll130=40U1:130

[Voip:U1]

VoipDirection=IO

VoipIpMask=0x00000000

VoipOwnUser=130

VoipOwnPwd=test130

VoipExpires=300

VoipAuth=www

VoipCompression=g711a g711u g729 g729a g729b g729ab

VoipSilenceSuppression=no

VoipSignalling=1

VoipMaxChan=8

VoipTxM=2

VoipDtmfTransport=0

VoipRFC2833PayloadType=101

VoipMediaWaitForConnect=Tone

9 Additional VoIP parameters

Page 137CELLX 16.2

9.3 Routing parameters

Table 9.5 Customized parameters: VoIP routing

VoIP Basic Parameters

VoipEnumDomain=<string>

Use this parameter to modify the domain name for the enum query (default is e164.arpa).

VoipOadMask=<num>

VoipDadMask=<num>

It is also possible to define the profile by destination or origination number (and not only by the

IP address). That means you can use different parameters not only for different IP addresses, but

also for different numbers (for example other codec, WaitForConnect, and so on). For example,

you can define a number for the head of the company, so that her MSN always uses G.711.

It is possible to configure a list of numbers for a total of up to 80 characters per line. You must

define the entry again if you need more numbers. You can also use a wildcard * at the end of the

number to match all calls with OADs or DADs beginning with the digits entered. Use a coma to

separate the numbers.

Example:

VoipDadMask=123, 345*, 567, ....,

VoipDadMask=912, 913*, 914, ....,

Bear in mind that you must enter numbers from specific to global (as for normal routing in the

route.cfg). That means you must enter a profile with more specific numbers above a profile with

more global numbers.

VoIPOwnIpAddress=<ip addr>

If the system is behind a NAT firewall that does not translate H.323 or SIP, the NAT firewall’s public

IP address is transmitted as own IP address in the H.323 or SIP protocol stack (not the private IP

address). In this case, the public IP address must be defined. Bear in mind that the NAT firewall

transmits the ports for signaling and voice data to the CELLX’s private IP address.

VoipUseEnum=<mode>

Enter yes (default no) to activate an ENUM query to the called number before the call is set up via

VoIP or PSTN. Using a standard DNS query, ENUM changes telephone numbers into Internet ad-

dresses. If a number is found, the call is set up via VoIP. If not, call setup occurs via PSTN or with

another VoIP profile.

NOTE: The query must include country and area codes.

VoipUseIpStack=<mode>

Enter Yes to facilitate direct use of an xDSL or dial-up connection if the corresponding profile is

defined. Default is No.

VoipUseStun=<mode>

Enter yes (default yes) to use the STUN values for the VoIP profile.

9 Additional VoIP parameters

Page 138CELLX 16.2

9.4 Quality parameters

Table 9.6 Customized parameters: VoIP quality

VoIP Quality Parameters

SigTos=<num>

Enter a value between 0 and 255 (default is 0) to set the TOS (type of service) field in the SIP/SIPS

packet IP header. Possible values are described in Table 9.7. If your IP network uses differentiated

services, you can also define the DSCP (differentiated services codepoint) for the SIP/SIPS packets.

The DSCP is the first six bits in the TOS octet.

NOTE: SigTos is set in the [System] section of the pabx.cfg file.

VoipAGC=<x y z>

This parameter allows automatic gain control of input signals from PSTN or IP. Enabling this fea-

ture compensates for near-far gain differences:

x - direction (0 for signals from TDM, 1 for signals from IP)

y - gain slope (controls gain changing ratio in -dBm/sec, values 0 to 31, default 0)

z - target energy (determines attempted signal energy value in -dBm, values 0 to 63, default 19

Gain Slope:

0 - 00.25dB 1 - 00.50dB 2 - 00.75dB

3 - 01.00dB 4 - 01.25dB 5 - 01.50dB

6 - 01.75dB 7 - 02.00dB 8 - 02.50dB

9 - 03.00dB 10 - 03.50dB 11 - 04.00dB

12 - 04.50dB 13 - 05.00dB 14 - 05.50dB

15 - 06.00dB 16 - 07.00dB 17 - 08.00dB

18 - 09.00dB 19 - 10.00dB 20 - 11.00dB

21 - 12.00dB 22 - 13.00dB 23 - 14.00dB

24 - 15.00dB 25 - 20.00dB 26 - 25.00dB

27 - 30.00dB 28 - 35.00dB 29 - 40.00dB

30 - 50.00dB 31 - 70.00dB

VoipAutoRtpAddr=<mode>

Some application scenarios require automatic RTP IP address and port detection for VoIP calls, for

example if a firewall or NAT changes the IP address of incoming RTP data. Enter Yes to activate

automatic detection. When No is set, RTP packets sources other than those processed are reject-

ed. Default No.

VoipBandwidthRestriction=<mode>

Enter Yes to include the VoIP profile in traffic shaping. Default is No. For a description of the func-

tionality, please refer to VoipMaximumBandwidth in Table 5.18.

VoipBrokenDetectionTimeout=<ms>

When this parameter is set, the system processes an interruption in the transmission of RTP/RTCP

data in the VoIP connection following the set number of milliseconds (default 0). This parameter

is necessary to set up an IntraSTAR call immediately when the IP connection is disrupted. Bear in

mind that VoipSilenceSuppression=No must appear in the VoIP profile.

VoipCallGroup=<name>

All outgoing VoIP calls for VoIP profiles with the same VoipCallGroup name are distributed cycli-

cally to these profiles.

VoipConnBrokenTimeout=<sec>

An entry is generated in the protocol.log file and the connection is terminated after a connection

broken exists for the number of seconds entered (default 300). If 0 is entered, no entry will be

generated and the connection will not be terminated.

VoipDJBufMaxDelay=<count>

Enter a value in milliseconds (0-320) to set a maximum jitter buffer limit (default 150). For fax

transmission (t.38) it is fixed to 200ms.

NOTE: VoipDJBufMaxDelay must be greater than VoipDJBufMinDelay.

9 Additional VoIP parameters

Page 139CELLX 16.2

VoipDJBufMinDelay=<count>

Enter a value in milliseconds (0-320) to set a minimum jitter buffer limit (default 35). For fax trans-

mission (t.38) it is fixed to 200ms.

NOTE: VoipDJBufMaxDelay must be greater than VoipDJBufMinDelay.

VoipDJBufOptFactor=<count>

Enter a value between 0 and 13 to set the balance between low frame erasure rates and low delay

(default 7).

VoipECE=<mode>

Enter yes (default) to set ITU G. 168 echo cancellation. Enter no to disable echo cancellation.

VoipEcl=<ms>

This parameter defines the required tail length for echo cancelation. The following values in ms

are possible:

64 (default)

128

VoipInputGain=<num>

The volume of VoIP calls coming from ISDN or mobile. The range is 0-63. The default value of 32

is 0 dB.

VoipIntrastar=<mode>

Enter Yes to activate the IntraSTAR feature. When the IP connection results in poor quality, an

ISDN call is sent to the peer and the voice data is automatically transmitted via ISDN.

VoipMediaWaitForConnect=<mode>

This parameter allows you to influence the system’s behavior in relation to voice channel negoti-

ation (RTP stream).

The following settings are possible:

No (default): RTP data is transmitted immediately after negotiation for RTP. SIP: Early Media is ac-

tivated; SDP is sent with 183 or 180.

Yes: The negotiation of RTP data is sent only after the connection has been established. SIP: SDP

is sent only with 200 and ack.

Tone: The VoIP peer or the connected PBX requires generation of inband signaling tones (alert,

busy, release).

NOTE: If Tone is entered, the tones are not played in the direction of the PBX if RTP is al-

ready exchanged before connect (inband is switched through).

Bear in mind that the parameter SWITCH in the VoIP controller’s Subscriber line must be removed

if the tones are played for the PBX.

If Tone is entered and the tones are played to VoIP, the VoIP media channel cannot be released

following an ISDN call disconnect as long as the tones are being transmitted. This can result in

CDR errors on the peer side.

VoipOverflow=<name>

When the value entered in VoipMaxChan is reached, all overflow calls will be sent to the profile

defined here. An alternative VoIP profile can also be used if the default profile can no longer be

used as a result of poor quality.

Table 9.6 Customized parameters: VoIP quality (continued)

VoIP Quality Parameters

9 Additional VoIP parameters

Page 140CELLX 16.2

VoipPCMPacketInterval=<int>

This parameter changes the default interval for PCM codecs (G.711, G.726). That means the

VoipTxm factor is muliplied using this interval:

For 16-channel chips:

0 = 20ms (default)

1 = 5 ms

2 = 10 ms

3 = 20 ms

For 8-channel chips:

0 = 10ms (default))

1 = 5 ms

2 = 10 ms

3 = 20 ms

VoipQualityCheck=<type minsamples limit recovertime>

type: Enter one of the following: ASR1, ASR2, RoundTripDelay, Jitter or FractionLost

When type is ASR1 or ASR2:

minsamples: Minimum number of calls for which ASR shall be calculated with:

limit: A value between 0 and 100

recovertime: Seconds to block the profile.

When type is RoundTripDelay:

minsamples: Minimum number of seconds RTD must be above:

limit: The highest acceptable value for RTD (in milliseconds)

recovertime: Seconds to block the profile.

When type is Jitter:

minsamples: Minimum number of seconds jitter must be above:

limit: The highest acceptable value for jitter (in milliseconds)

recovertime: Seconds to block the profile.

When type is FractionLost:

minsamples: Minimum number of seconds FL must be above:

limit: The highest acceptable value for FL (percentage between o and 100)

recovertime: Seconds to block the profile

NOTE: If you base VoipQualityCheck on the ASR values: During setup, calls are calculated

as not connected, which lowers the number of connected calls.

Example: If minsamples is set at 20, with a limit of 80%, 4 calls in the setup phase will lower the

ASR of the previous 20 calls to 80% and the profile will be blocked.

VoipResetVocoderOnReinvite=<yes/no>

Enter yes to create an audible delay in a voice call. Default no.

VoipRtcpTos=<num>

Enter a value between 0 and 255 to set the TOS (type of service) field in the RTCP packet IP head-

er. Possible values are described in Table 9.7. If your IP network uses diferentiated services, you

can also define the DSCP (differentiated services codepoint) for the RTCP packets. The DSCP is

the first six bits in the TOS octet.

NOTE: VoipUseIpStack must be 0 (default).

VoipRtpTos=<num>

Enter a value between 0 and 255 (default is 0) to set the TOS (type of service) field in the RTP

packet IP header. Possible values are described in Table 9.7. If your IP network uses differentiated

services, you can also define the DSCP (differentiated services codepoint) for the RTP packets. The

DSCP is the first six bits in the TOS octet.

VoipSilenceSuppression=<mode>

Activates silence suppression (see Table 5.26).

VoipT301=<sec>

An outgoing VoIP calls will be canceled in the state of Alerting (for H323) or Ringing (for SIP) if

the number of seconds entered has passed and there is no response from the IP or VoIP carrier.

Table 9.6 Customized parameters: VoIP quality (continued)

VoIP Quality Parameters

9 Additional VoIP parameters

Page 141CELLX 16.2

The following specifications for Quality of Service correspond with RFC791 and RFC1349.

VoipT303=<sec>

If this parameter is entered in a SIP profile, transmission of the INVITE is canceled after the number

of seconds entered has passed (default 10). The call can then be redirected, for example to PSTN.

This improves the reliability of the system when an IP or VoIP carrier’s service fails.

EXAMPLE:

Redirect340DF:=A

MapAllA=9

[Voip:DF]

.....

VoipT303=5

VoipT304=<sec>

An outgoing VoIP calls will be canceled in the state of Setup Acknowledge (for H323) or Trying

(for SIP) if the number of seconds entered has passed and there is no response from the IP or

VoIP carrier.

VoipT310=<sec>

An outgoing VoIP calls will be canceled in the state of Call Proceeding (for H323) or Session

Progress (for SIP) if the number of seconds entered has passed and there is no response from the

IP or VoIP carrier.

VoipTcpKeepAlive=<mode>

Enter yes (default) to send the RoundTripDelayRequest message every 10 seconds (necessary for

long calls with firewalls using TCP aging).

VoipVoiceVolume=<num>

The volume of VoIP calls coming from the Ethernet. The range is 0-63. The default value of 32 is

0 dB.

Table 9.6 Customized parameters: VoIP quality (continued)

VoIP Quality Parameters

Table 9.7 Quality of service values

Bit

Distribution

01234567

Precedence TOS MBZ

Bit Description

0-2 Precedence

3 TOS: 0=normal delay, 1=low delay

4TOS: 0=normal throughput, 1=high throughput

5 TOS: 0=normal reliability, 1=high reliability

6TOS: 0=normal service, 1=minimize monetary cost

7 MBZ: must be 0 (currently not used)

Precedence Description

111 Network control

110 Internetwork control

101 CRITIC/ECP

100 Flash override

9 Additional VoIP parameters

Page 142CELLX 16.2

9.5 Compression parameters

The following parameters are for RTP multiplexing, which aggregates RTP packets (voice user

data) for individual VoIP calls into a packet. The header (for Ethernet, IP, UDP and RTP) is sent

only once for all calls instead of for each individual call. The relationship between header and

payload benefits the payload when several calls occur simultaneously. This compression does

not result in any loss in voice quality.

This feature is possible with a Teles peer and requires the following entries in the VoIP profile:

011 Flash

010 Immediate

001 Priority

000 Routine

Table 9.7 Quality of service values (continued)

Table 9.8 Customized parameters: VoIP compression

VoIP Compression Parameters

VoipAggOwnDataPort=<port>

VoipAggOwnDataPort=29500

Enter the own port number used for aggregated packets. Default: 29500.

VoipAggRemoteDataPort=<port>

VoipAggRemoteDataPort=29500

Enter the port for the VoIP peer that is used for aggregated packets (compressed data). Default:

29500.

VoipAggRemoteRtpPort=<port>

Enter the port for the VoIP peer that is the first RTP port. The next port is always the corresponding

RTCP port. The port that is two numbers higher will be used for the next VoIP channel. Default

29000.

VoipAggRemoteRtpPortSpacing=<count>

Defines the space between the ports used for the peer’s individual RTP streams (default 2).

9 Additional VoIP parameters

Page 143CELLX 16.2

9.6 Fax/modem parameters

Table 9.9 Customized parameters: VoIP fax

VoIP Fax/Modem Parameters

VoipAPartyCanSwitchToT38=<mode>

Enter Yes (default) to activate fax detection in both directions. When No is set, fax detection and

translation to T.38 are carried out only when the call comes from VoIP.

VoipFaxBypassPayloadType=<num>

Defined the payload type for a fax’s RTP packets when T.38 is not used (default 102).

VoipFaxDisableAfterConnect=<sec>

Deactivates fax detection after the number of seconds entered has passed. This is intended to

avoid conversional disruption resulting from fax transmission noises when a fax machine is next

to a phone that has an established call.

VoipFaxECM=<mode>

You can use this parameter to enable the error correction mode for fax transmission: yes=en-

abled, no=disabled (default).

VoipFaxMaxRate=<num>

If the peer does not support auto negotiation or has a fixed transmission rate, you can define the

fixed rate:

0 - 2400 Bit/sec 1 - 4800

2 - 7200 3 - 9600 (default)

4 - 12000 5 - 14400

EXAMPLE:

VoipFaxMaxRate=5

VoipFaxTransport=<int>

0 = fax detection is switched off, no codec fallback at all (default).

1 = signaling will switch to T.38 (framesize 40ms). The codec will change when the system detects

a fax or modem connection on the channel.

2 = fallback to G711a (framesize 40ms).

NOTE: Bear in mind that if T.38 is defined in the VoipCompression=<list> parameter of

the VoIP profile, the system will switch only when it detects a modem connection. Fax calls

will still be transmitted using T.38.

VoipSuppressInitialT38Signalling=<mode> (SIP only)

Enter Yes to suppress the SDP header m=image t38 in all SIP messages until reinvite of the actual

fax detection occurs (default No).

VoipT38Enforce=<mode>

Enter Yes to switch to T38 although the B party does not signalize T38. (default Yes).

VoipT38Version=<int>

0 = T38 version 0 (default)

1 = T38 version 1

2 = T38 version 2002 ASN1 syntax TPKT enabled

3 = T38 version V34 V33 support 2002 ASN1 syntax TPKT enabled. Is needed to send v34 faxes

via T38.

The following parameters are responsible for setting the modem transport method if a modem con-

nection is detected.

VoipV21Transport=<mode>

0=disabled (must be set to 0).

VoipV22Transport=<mode>

0=disabled (default), 2=bypass.

VoipV23Transport=<mode>

0=disabled (default), 2=bypass.

9 Additional VoIP parameters

Page 144CELLX 16.2

9.7 DTMF parameters

VoipV32Transport=<mode>

0=disabled (default), 2=bypass .

VoipV34Transport=<mode>

0=disabled (default), 2= bypass.

Table 9.10 Customized parameters: VoIP DTMF

VoIP DTMF Parameters

VoipComprDtmfInband=<list>

This parameter always forced DTMF-tone inband transmission for the configured voice codes, re-

gardless of what is configured for: VoipDtmfTransport=. The same codecs can be configured as

for VoipCompression=<list>

VoipDtmfFallback=<int>

If VoipDtmfTransport=3 is set and the peer does not support DTMF transmission according to RFC

2833, the following settings apply:

2 = automatic fallback to inband

0 = automatic fallback to signaling messages (default)

VoipDtmfTransport=<int>

0 (H323) = DTMF relayed with H.225 signaling information.

0 (SIP) = DTMF relayed with SIP INFO.

1 = DTMF taken from audio stream and relayed to remote, meanwhile no rtp data is sent.

2 (default) = DTMF and MF kept in audio stream and not relayed.

3 = DTMF taken from audio stream and relayed to remote as per RFC2833, meanwhile rtp data

with silence is sent.

4 = For SIP, SIP INFO messages will be converted to DTMF. For H.323, the H.245 user input will

be converted to DTMF.

6 (H.323 only) DTMF relayed with H245 user input.

8 DTMF taken from audiostream to be further processed in the gateway.

VoipIBSDetectDir=<int>

Enter 1 and DTMF tones (and all other inband signaling) will be detected from the Ethernet side.

Enter 0 for DTMF tones to be detected from the PCM side (default). DTMF tones from the Ether-

net side are transmitted to the host as ISDN dialing information only if 1 is entered. In this case,

set VoipDtmfTransport to 1 or 3.

NOTE: If 1 is entered, fax detection is not supported.

VoipMinDigitOnTime=<ms>

Defines the minimum length of DTMF tones, to ensure DTMF tone detection. Default 0.

VoipMinInterDigitTime=<ms>

Sets a time interval for DTMF tone detection. Default 0.

VoipRFC2833PayloadType=<num>

This parameter changes the DTMF payload type. The default value is 96, a common value is 101.

Table 9.9 Customized parameters: VoIP fax (continued)

VoIP Fax/Modem Parameters

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 146CELLX 16.2

10.1 Configuration errors

When typographical errors are made in the configuration files, an entry appears in the pro-

tocol.log when the configuration is activated. This entry includes the line number and its

contents.

10.2 Status and error messages

The protocol.log file – assigned as the file for logging the protocol in the configuration file

(ActionLog=file) – contains information on all activities within the system.

In the example below, you can see that all activities are recorded beginning with the date and

time. If functions were activated by key combinations from terminal devices you can identify

these along with the service ID.

Example 10.1 Status and error messages

16.05.06-11:51:31,[990]Start STATUS - TELES.iGATE V11.7a (007f)

16.05.06-12:10:57,[01A]ERR: Layer1

16.05.06-12:10:58,[000]ERR: OK

16.05.06-12:10:58,[010]ERR: OK

16.05.06-12:12:06,Remote Control from IP 192.168.1.2

16.05.06-12:12:06,Remote Control: OK

16.05.06-12:12:16,Activate Configuration System

16.05.06-12:16:26,Remote Control Terminated

16.05.06-14:00:00,Activate Configuration Night2

16.05.06-14:00:00,Time Switch Operation

16.05.06-18:00:00,Activate Configuration Night3

16.05.06-18:00:00,Time Switch Operation

Table 10.1 Event log messages

Message NMS Definition

Status Program

[990] Start STATUS XTELES system software and sta-

tus program have been started.

System Start

[999] System-Boot XSystem restarted by timer.

[999] Remote Control: Reboot System restarted by remote ad-

ministration command.

Configuration Changes

Activate configuration <num>

Configuration <num> success-

fully loaded. Initiator displayed

in next line.

Activate configuration <num>

failed [<err>]

Configuration <num> could not

be loaded.

Remote Control: Date & Time

changed

Date and/or time were

changed via remote adminis-

tration.

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 147CELLX 16.2

Time Switch Operation The configuration change was

made by the timer.

Remote Administration

Remote Control from <peer>,

<RemoteCode>, <service>, 0

Remote administration access

from number or IP address.

Remote Control: OK Successful remote administra-

tion access.

[993]Remote Control: wrong

password

X Remote administration access

was denied because of a wrong

password.

[994]Remote Control: wrong

number

XRemote administration access

was denied because the call

originated from an unautho-

rized number (RemoteOrigina-

tion).

Remote Control Terminated

<start time>,<end time>,

<num>, <RemoteCode>, <ser-

vice>, 0

Remote administration session

from <num> ended. Session

length is indicated by start time

and end time.

Errors Reported by the Status Program

[<port><i>] ERR: Problem at

Port <num>

X A Layer 1 or Layer 2 error oc-

curred on <num>.

<i> indicates error type:

A Layer 1 error

; Layer 2 error

0 Layer 1&2 op-

erational.

4 RSSI (for mo-

bile only)

If the error persists, a differenti-

ation is possible through 'status

of the ports'.

If this message appears, status

inquiry connections via remote

administration are accepted

and NMS downloads the proto-

col.log file.

NOTE: If the RSSI falls below

the value configured in the

pabx.cfg, the port will shut

down automatically.

Attention: No Callback-Call

<num> Arrived

Callback with DTMF: the Call-

back Provider <num> did not

call back within approx. 20 sec.

Direct Line Access with DTMF:

the call was accepted but dis-

connected again within x sec.

(as defined by MapCallBack-

WaitDisc).

Table 10.1 Event log messages (continued)

Message NMS Definition

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 148CELLX 16.2

The following options are available for monitoring the Mobile Boards’ status or the status of

each mobile channel. You can access status information through data recorded in the proto-

col.log file or in the Layer 1 column in the GATE Manager’s Port Status window.

The following status and error messages appear in the protocol.log file when ALARM appears

in the VoIP port’s subscriber line:

Write error Access to the disk drive on

which the data is to be stored

was not possible because it is

set for read-only, full or be-

cause of faulty hardware or

software.

[995] Msg-Memory > 75% XThis message appears when

message memory is over 75%

full.

If this message appears, status

inquiry connections via remote

administration are accepted

and NMS downloads the proto-

col.log file.

Table 10.1 Event log messages (continued)

Message NMS Definition

Table 10.3 Protocol log status and error messages

Message Definition

System Configuration (a)

config: <num> duplicate profile Specified line in pabx.cfg or route.cfg contains

duplicate profile.

config: <num> invalid Specified line in pabx.cfg or route.cfg is invalid.

config: evaluation errcode <num> Internal error.

Port-Specific Entries

[<port>]Unblock Port The <port> has been unblocked. This can occur

via remote access for all controller types.

[<port>]Block Port The <port> has been blocked. This can occur via

remote access for all controller types.

[<port>]Restart Port The <port> has been blocked. This can occur via

remote access for all controller types.

Ethernet Interface

[99d]ERR: emac<num><state> The Ethernet controller’s status is checked every

minute and any change in status is noted.

<num> Number of the EMAC interface

(0 or 1).

<state> up Ethernet link is active

down Ethernet link is inactive

!resolve ip-address ARP request for specified IP address failed.

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 149CELLX 16.2

pingcheck failed Ping to configured server failed for configured

amount of time; host might reboot this port.

Voice Packetizer Task (b)

[<port>]ERR: OK, <count> devices The number (<count>) of DSPs were loaded dur-

ing startup without errors. The first VoIP control-

ler appears in [<port>].

[<port>]ERR: init failed A DSP could not be loaded. This DSP or the first

VoIP controller is defined in [<port>].

VP: <channel> <msg> Voice-packetizer chips report fatal error on spec-

ified channel, with specified message.

VoIP (c)

GK <name> URC Successful UnRegister from specified gatekeep-

er.

GK <name> GRJ <num> GatekeeperRequest was rejected

GK <name> RCF Successful RegistrationRequest (Registration-

Confirm).

GK <name> RRJ <num> RegistrationRequest was rejected.

GK <name> ARJ <dad> <num> AdmissionRequest was rejected.

GK <name> !ACF dad AdmissionRequest was not answered.

GK <name> !GCF GatekeeperRequest was not answered.

no profile for ipaddress Incoming VoIP call from specified IP address was

rejected due to no matching VoIP profile.

registrar <name>: registration done Successful registration at SIP registrar.

registrar <name>: wrong auth-type <num> Registrar does not perform MD5 for authentica-

tion.

registrar <name>: gives no nonce Nonce missing in response from registrar (possi-

ble error in registrar configuration).

registrar <name>: registration forbidden Registration with specified registrar is not al-

lowed.

registrar <name> not answering Specified registrar does not respond.

voipconn oad->dad broken Voice codec chips report broken RTP connection.

voip FdInitAll failed <cause> Internal failure.

voip ISDNListen failed Internal failure.

voipIpSocketInit failed Internal failure.

!DNS-lookup <hostname> DNS lookup for specified host name failed (DNS

not activated? Missing or invalid DNS server?).

message from <ip addr> not decodable H323, ASN1 packet cannot be decoded.

vGATE

Table 10.3 Protocol log status and error messages (continued)

Message Definition

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 150CELLX 16.2

[99]ERR: SimUnit !connect An outgoing connection to the vGATE SIM Unit

could not be established.

[99]ERR: ControlUnit <ip addr> !connect An outgoing connection to the vGATE Control

Unit could not be established.

Number Portability

[99i]ERR: np !connect Connection to the iMNP could not be estab-

lished.

[99i]ERR: np connect <ip addr> Connection to the iMNP reestablished.

System Kernel (e)

task <name> suspended specified task was suspended due to internal er-

ror; host might reboot this port.

Mail (f)

cdr !connect <ip addr> sending CDR: TCP connect to specified IP ad-

dress failed.

mail !connect <ip addr> sending e-mail: TCP connect to specified IP ad-

dress failed.

Radius (g)

!DNS-lookup <hostname> DNS lookup for specified host name failed (DNS

not activated? Missing or invalid DNS server?).

timeout auth <ip addr> Authentication request to specified Radius server

failed due to timeout.

timeout acnt <ip addr> Accounting request to specified Radius server

failed due to timeout.

!rsp-auth <ip addr> Response authenticator from specified Radius

server was invalid (wrong secret/password?).

!auth <ip addr> <num> Authentication denied by specified Radius server.

Configuration Errors in the ip.cfg

Error in ip.cfg line <line>: section [<section_name>] unknown

Error in ip.cfg line <line>: parameter "<parameter_name>" in [<section_name>] unknown

Error in ip.cfg line <line>: parameter "<parameter_name>" does not belong to any Section

There is an error in the NAT Configuration

The NAT was not loaded, please check the Configuration for mistakes

There is an error in the DHCPD Configuration

The DHCP SERVER was not loaded, please check the Configuration for mistakes

There is an error in the ALTQD Configuration

The ALTQD SERVER was not loaded, please check the Configuration for mistakes

There is an error in the FIREWALL Configuration

The FIREWALL was not loaded, please check the Configuration for mistakes

Error in <dsl_interface> Connection failed. Please, connect a cable in the <ethernet> port

Table 10.3 Protocol log status and error messages (continued)

Message Definition

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 151CELLX 16.2

10.3 Software update

You may find that you would like to implement features that are only possible with a more

recent software version. To update the software on your system, follow these instructions:

1. To get the necessary software files for your system, you need to contact your local

sales representative.

2. To update your system software, download the following software files to your hard

disk:

start

netbsdz

netbsdfs.gz

ip4.vnd

netbsdi

xgate.vnd

and one of the following:

CELLX GSM: igate.tz1 or

CELLX CDMA: cgate.tz1 or

CELLX UMTS: igate.tz1

3. To update your GUI, download the following software files to your hard disk:

httpd.izg

httpd.tz2

4. Start GATE Manager and connect to the system you want to update.

5. Check the software version running on your system to make sure the one you want

to install is newer.

6. In the navigation bar, click Directory.

7. Right-click the Directory window and click Send To System.

8. Once the files have been completely transferred, check the file size and reboot the

system.

Error in <dsl_interface>: Connection Failed. Please, revise your Username/Password configuration

Error in <dsl_interface>: Connection Failed. Please, revise the DSL Modem

Table 10.3 Protocol log status and error messages (continued)

Message Definition

Follow the below listed hints:

• Make sure no traffic is running on the system while updating the system. Do not turn the

system off during the update.

• Never mix the different driver versions.

• Make sure there is enough available memory for the new version. We recommend that

you delete unnecessary log files and backups.

• Do NOT delete or rename existing software files before updating.

• Upload the new files ONLY via GATE Manager. Do not use any other process (e.g. FTP) to

update the software files. This can lead to irreversible damage to the operating system.

• If an error message appears during the update process, do NOT restart or turn off the sys-

tem! Make a note of the error message and the update steps that have been taken and

contact TELES service.

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 152CELLX 16.2

9. As soon as you can reach the system via GATE Manager again, check the version

number of the running software.

An update of the following optional function modules occurs in the same way. For a descrip-

tion of how to update the software, please refer to Chapter 10.3 Software update.

Make sure the file extension has the same running number as that of the file on the system:

SNMP agent: snmpd.tz0

DNS forwarder: dnsmasg.tz2

IP update - DynDNS client: ipupdate.tz2

Since these features are only required in individual cases, they are not part of the default soft-

ware packet. They can be installed as stand-alone modules for the desired function. The de-

scription of the functionality of individual modules appears in their respective chapters.

Following completion of transmission, you must adjust the module’s configuration and re-

boot the CELLX. Once you have rebooted the system, you can use the required features.

10.4 SNMP agent

This module allows you to connect the systems and their functions to an SNMP-based net-

work monitoring system. With this module, SNMP requests are answered and alarm messag-

es (for example Layer 1 errors on E1 lines) and error recovery messages are sent via SNMP trap.

The trap consists of a generic trap linkUp or linkDown, and a specific trap.

Table 10.4 contains a list of the most easily verifiable specific traps:

These files form a unit and belong to the same software version. To avoid

compatibility conflicts, check with TELES service before you update the software.

The following software package must be installed: snmpd.tz0.

Table 10.4 Specific trap

Error Code Definition

0 Port registered/up

1Wrong PIN

4Bad RSSI

7Unknown error, port restarted

9 Port restart

11 Layer 2 problem

12 SIM blocked

14 SIM barred

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 153CELLX 16.2

SNMP requests retrieve the value of a variable or list of variables (GET/GETBULK) referred to

as OIDs. Each OID identifies a variable that can be read via SNMP, as described in Table 10.5.

17 Layer 1 problem / port down

18 SIM missing

21 Registration failed

39 Call limit reached

40 SMS limit reached

41 Assign limit reached

42 SIM inserted

47 ACD limit reached

48 SIM removed

0eth0 / eth1 up

52 eth0 / eth1 down

Table 10.4 Specific trap (continued)

Error Code Definition

Table 10.5 Description of OIDs

OID Description Type

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.2.1.1.1 Port number INTEGER

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.2.1.1.2 Port address DisplayString

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.2.1.1.3 Port type DisplayString

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.2.1.1.4 State of port line 1 DisplayString

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.2.1.1.5 State of port line 2 DisplayString

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.2.1.1.6 Number of currently active con-

nections on port

INTEGER

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.2.1.1.7 Overall state of port INTEGER

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.2.1.1.8 Calls rejected due to no chan-

nel available

INTEGER

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.2.1.1.9 Calls rejected due to busy INTEGER

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.2.1.1.10 Calls rejected due to no user INTEGER

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.2.1.1.11 Calls disconnected INTEGER

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.2.1.1.12 Outgoing calls INTEGER

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.2.1.1.13 Incoming calls INTEGER

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.2.1.1.14 Channels in use more than 90

percent

INTEGER

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.2.1.1.15 Accumulated call duration INTEGER

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 154CELLX 16.2

Traps are generated for all line or mobile ports. The running number in the trap corresponds

with the port. The module also monitors whether the voice codec chips are functioning cor-

rectly.

The traps for the IP interfaces are also generated in ascending order according to the follow-

ing list:

If more than one pppoe<x> profile is configured, the number will also increase.

Bear in mind that the keyword ALARM must be entered in the appropriate PRI, BRI or mobile

port’s Subscriber line in the pabx.cfg. The MIBs (Management Information Bases) are included

on the product CD in the folder MIB. The module name snmpd.tz0 must have the ending tz0!

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.2.2.1.1 Number of Ethernet controller INTEGER

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.2.2.1.2 Overall state of Ethernet con-

troller

INTEGER

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.1.1.1.1.1 Number of VoIP profile INTEGER

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.1.1.1.1.2.1 Name of profile 1 DisplayString

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.1.1.1.1.2.2 Name of profile 2 DisplayString

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.1.1.1.1.2.3 Name of profile 3 DisplayString

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.1.1.1.1.3 Peer address of profile INTEGER

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.1.1.1.1.3.1 Peer address of profile 1 DisplayString

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.1.1.1.1.3.2 Peer address of profile 2 DisplayString

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.1.1.1.1.3.3 Peer address of profile 3 DisplayString

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.1.1.1.1.4 Registration state of profile INTEGER

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.1.1.1.1.4.1 Registration state of profile 1 INTEGER

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.1.1.1.1.4.2 Registration state of profile 2 INTEGER

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.1.1.1.1.4.3 Registration state of profile 3 INTEGER

1.3.6.1.4.1.2170.1.1.1.1.1.5 Profile registration cause INTEGER

Table 10.5 Description of OIDs (continued)

OID Description Type

Table 10.6 Traps for IP interfaces

Port Number Interface

0 Ethernet 1

1Ethernet 2

2 Loopback

3xppp= (if used)

4 pppoe= (if used)

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 155CELLX 16.2

The following settings are possible in the [snmpd] section in the pabx.cfg file:

10.5 DNS forwarder

With this module, the system can function as a DNS server for the clients in the local network.

The system in the local network sent the DNS query to the CELLX, which forwards the queries

to a known DNS server address if no valid entry for the query is known.

The advantage is that the clients always enter the CELLX’s address as DNS server address, so

that no public DNS server address is required. The CELLX functions in this scenario as a router.

Of course, the DNS server’s address can also be transmitted to the clients using the integrated

DHCP server. If the CELLX is used as a DSL router or if it sets up a dial-up connection, no entry

is required in the pabx.cfg for the parameter NameServer. The DNS server’s address that is

negotiated through this connection will be used.

Table 10.7 Settings in the [snmpd]section

Parameter Definition

Port=<port> Defines the target port for the get service (de-

fault 161). The port for the trap server is fixed at

162.

TrapServer=<ip addr> Enter the SNMP trap server’s IP address. Example

for listing more than one:

TrapServer=192.168.0.10 192.168.0.12

Community=<password> Enter a password for a community (group). The

default password is public.

The current implementation evaluates the con-

figured password only when sending a trap. GET

requests use the default value.

Example 10.2 Settings in the [snmpd]section

[snmpd]

TrapServer=192.168.0.1

Community=ABCDE

The following software package must be installed: dnsmasg.tz2.

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 156CELLX 16.2

10.6 ipupdate - DynDNS client

This function allows you to assign a defined hostname to an IP address that changes dynam-

ically. That means that you can always reach a device or service through the public IP network,

even if, for example, it is a common DSL connection with dynamic IP address allocation. Sev-

eral providers support this service.

Make the following entries in the system’s pabx.cfg, in the [DynDNS] section:

The following software package must be installed: ipupdate.tz2.

Table 10.8 pabx.cfg: DynDNS

DynDNS Parameters

service=<type>

Specifies which provider is used. The following providers are supported:

dhs

dyndns

dyndns-static

dyns

ezip

easydns

easydns-partner

gnudip

heipv6tb

pgpow

ods

tzo

zoneedit

http://www.dhs.org

http://www.dyndns.org

http://www.dyns.cx

http://www.ez-ip.net

http:/www.easydns.com

http://www.gnudip.cheapnet.net

http://www.hn.org

http:www.justlinux.com

http://ods.org

http://www.tzo.com

http://zoneedit.com

user=<username:password>

Defines the username and password for the DNS service provider.

host=<domain_name_of_dns_service>

Enter the domain name that is used.

interface=<If>

Defines the interface to be used. Possible entries are emac0, emac1, pppoe0. The dynamic IP ad-

dress for this interface is transmitted to the service provider.

max-interval=<sec>

Defines the value in seconds in which actualization of the name in the DNS database must occur.

2073600 seconds (24 days) is the default value. The shortest interval allowed is 60 seconds. Bear

in mind that this setting may cause the provider to block the domain name, since multiple regis-

trations in short intervals are often not allowed. You must clear this with your provider.

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 157CELLX 16.2

In the following example, the DynDNS service is used and the domain name is host.do-

main.de; the username is user and the password is pwd. The CELLX works as DSL router and

the dynamically allocated IP address of the PPPoE interface is used.

Included in the possible uses for this feature is remote access to the CELLX when the IP con-

nection does not have a fixed IP address. In this case, you can access the system, for example

with the GATE Manager, if the host name is used in the Remote Number dialog. Example en-

try in the Remote Number dialog: IP:host.domain.de.

10.7 Trace

During operation, the trace readouts of the CELLX can be saved in a file or transmitted with

remote maintenance directly. The trace options must be turned on in the GATE Manager (of-

fline or online trace) or via FTP raw commands (see Chapter 4.10.3 FTP). Trace results present-

ed here are for PRI,VoIP, GSM/CDMA/UMTS interfaces and for the following services in

various levels:

Example 10.3 DynDNS

[DynDNS]

service=dyndns

user=user:pwd

host=host.domain.de

interface=pppoe0

max-interval=2073600

Table 10.9 Trace options

Option Definition

Mail Output for all SMTP packets.

NumberPortability Output of all packets for communication with

the iMNP.

VoiceCodecs Output of RTCP information described under VP

module.

PPP Output of PPP connection information.

DTMF Output for DTMF tone detection.

Remote Output for GATE Manager and NMS communi-

cation. For offline traces only.

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 158CELLX 16.2

Figure 10.1 GATE Manager: online trace activation window

CELLXs offer two different types of trace:

Online - trace information is immediately displayed in the GATE Manager’s trace

window.

Offline - trace information is written to a file on the CELLX.

CELLX systems create trace files when the TraceLog=file entry is present in the pabx.cfg. Trac-

es can be activated via remote administration (GATE Manager or FTP).

The following table describes the fields that are on the online trace activation window. For

offline traces, some fields are not provided.

Table 10.10 Online trace activation window

Field Description

Trace Type

Layer 2 and 3 Select this option if the trace is to contain layer 2 and 3 messages.

Layer 3 only Select this option if the trace is to contain layer 3 messages only.

DSS1/NI2 Select this option if the trace is to contain DSS1/NI2 messages only.

SS7 For SS7 messages, select this option.

Translate Trace

Layer 2 To translate layer 2 messages into plain text, select this option.

Layer 3 To translate layer 3 messages into plain text, select this option.

Local Trace File

Create Trace File Check this box if you want to store a trace file locally on your computer.

File Name Click this button to change the default directory and file name of the

local trace file.

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 159CELLX 16.2

Trace output format

The following entries appear at the beginning and end of each trace:

DD.MM.YY-hh:mm:ss.ss, Start

DD.MM.YY-hh:mm:ss.ss, End

– DD = day

– hh = hour

– MM = month

– mm = minute

– YY = year

– ss.ss = hundredths of seconds

Ports to Trace

All Select this option to trace all ports.

Only Port Number Enter here the port which you want to trace.

Port Mask Select from this port mask which ports you want to trace.

IP Trace

Mail, Number Portability,

vGATE, ...

Contains a list of port-independent trace options. The different options

can be limited to error messages, debug messages, or detailed trace

output. The Advanced field is for TELES support usage only.

For an explanation of the different trace option please refer to

Chapter 10.9 Trace options on page 157.

CASR2

Timeslots Select which of the channels you want to trace for the CASR2 ports.

General Trace Check this box if you want to run a general trace for the different

timeslots.

Level Select which special type of information you want to trace for the dif-

ferent timeslots.

Additional The following additional entries are possible. The number behind the

colon referes to the trace level. 0 = no traces, 1 = few traces, 2 = many

traces, 3 = very many traces (only nstanl).

autodial:0 for auto dial trace messages

fctrans:trclevel=debug for ISDN facility to SIP converter messages

nstanl:0 for call routing trace messages

radius:0 for RADIUS trace messages

rtman:0 for routing manager trace messages

s0:0 for BRI trace messages

s2m:0 for PRI and switching matrix trace messages

voip:noreg to suppress traces of REGISTER and responses

Please bear in mind that the volume of trace readouts can grow quite large, so that faulty

transmission of the trace data may result with remote maintenance. A trace at full capacity

can cause the system to crash.

Table 10.10 Online trace activation window (continued)

Field Description

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 160CELLX 16.2

Traces appear in the following format:

[<hh:mm:ss>] <module>[<port>]: <trace>

<module>

– s = send for PRI/BRI or mobile ports

– r = receive for PRI/BRI or mobile ports

– x = send to VoIP destinations

– y = receive from VoIP destinations

– i = information messages and internal trace outputs between VoIP and the other

interfaces (ISDN, mobile)

– a = VoIP controllers RTCP output

–m = mail output

– g = remote output

<port>

– port number (controller number in the pabx.cfg) or 255 if a service is used

<trace>

– output in the defined syntax for the module

10.7.1 ISDN trace output

Trace output for DSS1 are in hexadecimal notation. You can use the external tool Trace-

View.exe to translate offline trace output. You will find the tool in the Software folder on

the enclosed CD. The GATE Manager’s trace window can also display translated online traces.

The following example shows an untranslated DSS1 trace.

Example 10.4 ISDN trace output

17.05.06-09:54:40,Start 11.7a (L3)

[09:55:14.58] r[00]: 00 01 02 02 08 02 00 02 05 04 03 80 90 a3 18 03 a1 83 81 6c

02 81 31 70 06 81 31 32 33 34 35 7d 02 91 81

[09:55:14.58] s[00]: 02 01 02 04 08 02 80 02 0d 18 03 a9 83 81

[09:55:14.58] s[01]: 00 01 a8 9a 08 02 00 46 05 04 03 80 90 a3 18 03 a1 83 89 6c

02 81 31 70 06 81 31 32 33 34 35 7d 02 91 81

[09:55:14.58] r[01]: 02 01 9a aa 08 02 80 46 0d 18 03 a9 83 89

[09:55:14.86] r[01]: 02 01 9c aa 08 02 80 46 01

[09:55:14.86] s[00]: 02 01 04 04 08 02 80 02 01

[09:55:16.73] r[01]: 02 01 9e aa 08 02 80 46 07 29 05 05 07 01 09 33 4c 07 01 81

31 32 33 34 35

[09:55:16.73] s[01]: 00 01 aa a0 08 02 00 46 0f

[09:55:16.73] s[00]: 02 01 06 04 08 02 80 02 07 29 05 05 07 01 09 32 4c 07 01 81

31 32 33 34 35

[09:55:16.73] r[00]: 00 01 04 08 08 02 00 02 0f

[09:55:44.30] r[00]: 00 01 06 08 08 02 00 02 45 08 02 80 90

[09:55:44.35] s[01]: 00 01 ac a0 08 02 00 46 45 08 02 80 90

[09:55:46.71] r[01]: 02 01 a0 ae 08 02 80 46 4d

[09:55:46.71] s[01]: 00 01 ae a2 08 02 00 46 5a

[09:55:46.71] s[00]: 02 01 08 08 08 02 80 02 4d

[09:55:46.71] r[00]: 00 01 08 0a 08 02 00 02 5a

17.05.06-09:51:33,End

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 161CELLX 16.2

10.7.2 GSM/CDMA/UMTS trace output

The trace output for GSM appears in hexadecimal notation. Its format is the same as that for

ISDN output. Table 10.11 and Table 10.12 describe the contents of GSM trace output.

Table 10.11 Request messages to the GSM module

Hex Value Description

00 Setup

01 Connect

02 Disconnect

03 SMS

04 DTMF

05 Set Config

06 Get Config

07 LED

08 Restart

09 Switch SIM

Table 10.12 Incoming, indication message from the GSM module

Hex Value Description

0B Alert

0C Voice Indication

0D Connect

0E DTMF

0F Setup

10 Disconnect

11 SMS

12 SMS Confirmation

13 Error

16 Get Config Confirmation

18 Dial-End Call Proceeding

19 USSD

1A Restart Indication

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 162CELLX 16.2

The following example shows a GSM call through the fourth GSM controller.

10.7.3 VoIP trace output

As described above in Chapter 10.7 Trace, there are four modules for VoIP traces. The groups

x (send), y (receive) and i (information and internal output) appear when a Layer2 or Layer3

offline or online trace is started. Group a (RTCP output) only appears when the module Voice

Codecs is active.

Particularly in the case of VoIP connections (protocols H.323 and SIP), the trace output is quite

extensive and abbreviations make it difficult to keep track of the results. The following list

contains a description of H.323 output.

Output for the signaling protocol SIP is transmitted in ASCII and translated for better legibility.

Since they are displayed unabridged, no description is necessary. Information and internal

output traces correspond with the H.323 output and are described in the following tables.

For ENUM, please refer to Chapter 10.7.3.5 ENUM output.

In general, the following rules apply for this trace output:

The information is thoroughly analyzed where it is received (all rcv messages).

Example 10.5 GSM call through fourth GSM controller

Status Request

[14:57:51.80] s[04]: 06

Status Information:

[14:57:51.80] r[04]: 16

Setup Request:

[14:57:52.29] s[04]: 00 4c 93 04 00 00 00 35 36 36 37 00 35 38 2c 36 34 36 2c 33

30 2c 2c 2c 30 2c 2c 2c 30 2c 32 36 32 2c 30 37 2c 00 72 64 09 75 70 20 7b 64 35

7d 20 27 2e 2e 2b 43 43 45 44 3a 20 32 36 32 2c 30 37 2c 34

Dial End:

[14:57:55.47] r[04]: 18

Alert:

[14:57:55.63] r[04]: 0b

Connect Indication:

[14:57:56.63] r[04]: 0d

Disconnect Request:

[14:59:54.13] s[04]: 02 4c 93 00

Disconnect Indication:

[14:59:54.19] r[04]: 10

Table 10.13 H.323 output

Packet Description

h225 H.225-protocol messages.

h245 H.245-protocol messages.

pstn Messages of the internal protocol interface that

provides the interface to the other interfaces PRI,

BRI and GSM.

rcv Coming from the IP network or the internal pro-

tocol interface; appears with <dir> in the trace

lines.

snd Sending to the IP network or the internal proto-

col interface; appears with <dir> in the trace

lines.

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 163CELLX 16.2

10.7.3.1 Interface IP network

Establish H.323 session

Usually there is trace output that displays a new H.323 session. The direction is crucial (wheth-

er the call is going into or coming out of the IP network).

The outut syntax is h225connect to <ip address> cr <cr> s <si> for calls going into

the IP network and h225accept from <ip address> s <si> for calls coming out of the

IP network.

H.225 signaling output

The following trace results are for a call coming from the IP network. rcv will appear at <dir>

and signifies the direction: h225<dir> tpkt msg 0x<mt> h225cr <cr> addr <ip ad-

dress>.

Table 10.14 H.323 session

Trace Output Description

connect to Outgoing VoIP call

accept from Incoming VoIP call

<ip address> Peer's IP address

cr <cr> Call reference (corresponds with the internal

protocol interface's PSTN call reference)

s <si> Session ID

Table 10.15 H.225 signaling

Trace Output Description

<mt> The ETS message type in hexadecimal; can con-

sist of values listed in Table 10.16.

<hcr> H.225 call reference in hexadecimal (does not

have to be unique when calls come from multiple

peers).

<ip address> The peer's IP address.

Table 10.16 ETS message types

Hex Value Message Type

1 Alerting

2Call Proceeding

3 Progress

5Setup

7 Connect

DSetup Acknowledge

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 164CELLX 16.2

The following lines show the packet contents in detail:

h225 decode rc 0, q931 msg 0x<mt> = 0, len <length>

h225<type> <mt> voipcfg addr <ip address> rc 0 compr <codec>

h225<type> <mt> h225cr <hcr> FS:<bool> (<codec>,<ip address>,<port>)

TUNN:<bool> H245:<bool>(<ip address>,<port>)

h225<type> <mt> h225cr <hcr> cr <cr>

5A Release Complete

62 Facility

6E Notify

7B Information

7D Status

Table 10.16 ETS message types (continued)

Hex Value Message Type

Table 10.17 Incoming VoIP calls

Trace Output Description

<mt> Message type in hexadecimal as per ETS stan-

dard (see Table 10.16) or written out as a name.

len <length> Packet length in bytes.

h225<type> H.225 rcv or send; received or sent from the IP

network.

addr <ip address> Peer's IP address.

compr <codec> Peer's compression list (see Table 10.18).

FS<bool> FastStart offered in the signaling packet or not.

(<codec>, Lists codecs offered (seeTable 10.38).

<ip address>, Peer's IP address for RTP data.

<port>) Peer's port for RTP Data.

Tunn<bool> Shows whether or not tunneling is offered as a

signaling variant.

H245<bool> Shows an extra H.245 session.

(ip address, Peer's IP address.

port) Peer's port.

h225cr <hcr> H.225 message's call reference (does not have to

be unique when calls come from multiple VoIP

peers).

cr <cr> Internal call reference (always unique for the

call).

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 165CELLX 16.2

When the call is sent in the direction of the IP network, the trace will include only the most

important information: h225<type> <mt1> dad <num> cr <cr>.

Table 10.18 Compression codecs used

Synonym Codec

A G.711Alaw64k

BG.711Ulaw64k

C G.7231

DG.728

E G.729

FgsmFullRate

G T.38fax

OG.729A

P G.72616

QG.72624

R G.72632

SG.729B

T G.729AB

UG.729E

V G.723L

WTransparent

X G.721

YiLBC20

ZiLBC30

Table 10.19 Calls to the IP network 1

Trace Output Description

<mt> Message type written out; if a decimal number

appears here, it will be translated as per Table

10.16.

<num> Called party number.

<cr> Call reference.

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 166CELLX 16.2

Or: h225<type> callproc typ <mt> cr <cr>.

RTP/RTCP output

The RTP/RTCP output displays whether the signaling information corresponds with the con-

tents of the compression chips. The output occurs when a media channel is set up or torn

down:

rtp start cr <cr> ch <ch> li <li> ri <ri> st <st> fx <fx> cp <comp> txm

<factor>.

The RTP stop message has the following syntax: rtp stop cr <cr>1 ch <ch>.

The following output shows the RTCP packet statistics:

Table 10.20 Calls to the IP network 2

Trace Output Description

<mt> The ETS message type in hexadecimal.

<cr> Call reference.

Table 10.21 RTP/RTCP output

Trace Output Description

<cr> Call reference.

<ch> The internal media channel used.

<li> 1 appears when the local RTP address (and port)

has been defined.

<ri> 1 appears when the remote RTP address (and

port) have been established.

<st> 0 appears if the channel's voice packetizer has

not yet been started. 1 appears if the voice pack-

etizer can receive, but not send. 2 appears when

the voice packetizer can receive and send.

<fx> 1 appears when T.38 (fax) is used, otherwise 0.

<comp> The codec used, as per Table 10.18.

<factor> Multiplication factor for default frame size

(20ms, 30 ms for G.723).

Table 10.22 RTP stop message

Trace Output Description

<cr> Call reference.

<ch> The internal media channel used.

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 167CELLX 16.2

rtcp <ch>: SR <dir> pc <pc> oc <oc> ji <ji> rt <rt> fl <fl> cl <cl>.

The following output shows the jitter buffer status:

a[<controller>]: <VoIPcodecChipType> ch <ch> jitter buffer n1 n2 n3n4 n5

n6 n7 n8.

An RTP connection has ended when the following trace output appears:

Table 10.23 RTCP packet statistics

Trace Output Description

<ch> The internal media channel used.

SR<dir> Rx sender report (received) is more interesting,

since it comes from the peer. Tx sender report

(transmitted).

<pc> Packet count (number of packets transmitted/re-

ceived).

<oc> Octet count (number of octets transmitted/re-

ceived).

<ji> Delay jitter [msec].

<rt> Round-trip local<->remote, round-trip delay

[msec].

<fl> Fraction lost: Fraction of packets lost [8lsb].

<cl> Cumulative lost: number of lost packets [24lsb].

Table 10.24 Jitter buffer status

Trace Output Description

n1 SteadyStateDelay in milliseconds

n2 NumberOfVoiceUnderrun

n3 NumberOfVoiceOverrun

n4 NumberOfVoiceDecoderBfi (bfi = bad frame in-

terpolation)

n5 NumberOfVoicePacketsDropped

n6 NumberOfVoiceNetPacketsLost

n7 NumberOfIbsOverrun (ibs = in band signaling)

n8 NumberOfCasOverrun

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 168CELLX 16.2

a[<controller>]: <VoIPcodecChipType> stop ch=<ch>.

The following output results when the codec changes for a fax connection:

a[<controller>]: ac49x ch <ch> fax/data n1 n2 n3.

Table 10.25 RTP stop message (VP module)

Trace Output Description

<ch> The internal media channel used.

Table 10.26 Codec change for fax

Trace Output Description

n1 Fax bypass flag:

0Voice, data bypass or fax relay

1Fax bypass

n2 Signal detected on decoder output (see Table

10.27)

n3 Signal detected on encoder input (see Table

10.27)

Table 10.27 fax or data signal event

Value Definition Description

0SILENCE_OR_UNKNOWN Undefined (unknown signal or

silence)

1FAX_CNG CNG-FAX (calling fax tone,

1100 Hz)

2ANS_TONE_2100_FAX_CED_O

R_MODEM

FAX-CED or modem-ANS (an-

swer tone, 2100 Hz)

3ANS_TONE_WITH_REVERSALS ANS (answer tone with rever-

sals)

4ANS_TONE_AM ANSam (AM answer tone)

5ANS_TONE_AM_REVERSALS ANSam (AM answer tone with

reversals)

6FAX_V21_PREAMBLE_FLAGS FAX-V.21 preamble flags

7FAX_V8_JM_V34 FAX-V.8 JM (fax call function,

V.34 fax)

8VXX_V8_JM_VXX_DATA V.XX-V.8 JM (data call func-

tion, V-series modem)

9V32_AA V.32 AA (calling modem tone,

1800 Hz)

10 V22_USB1 V.22 USB1 (V.22(bis) unscram-

bled binary ones)

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 169CELLX 16.2

Fax relay is activated for the corresponding channel:

a[<controller>]: Ac49xActivateFaxRelayCommand(1) ch <ch> rc <cr>.

The following output shows various values for fax transmission (see Table 10.28 for a descrip-

tion of the values):

a[<controller>]: ac49x ch <ch> faxrelay: n1 n2 n3 n4 n5 n6 n7 n8 n9 n10 n11

n12 n13 n14 n15 n16 n17.

11 V8_BIS_INITIATING_DUAL_TO

V.8bis initiating dual tone

(1375 Hz and 2002 Hz)

12 V8_BIS_RESPONDING_DUAL_T

ONE

V.8bis responding dual tone

(1529 Hz and 2225 Hz)

13 VXX_DATA_SESSION V.XX data session

14 V21_CHANNEL_2 V.21 channel 2 (mark tone,

1650 Hz)

15 V23_FORWARD_CHANNEL V.23 forward channel (mark

tone, 1300 Hz)

16 V21_CHANNEL_1=18 V.21 channel 1 (mark tone,

980 Hz)

17 BELL_103_ANSWER_TONE Bell 103 answer tone, 2225 Hz

18 TTY TTY

19 FAX_DCN FAX-DCN (G.3 fax disconnect

signal)

Table 10.27 fax or data signal event (continued)

Value Definition Description

Table 10.28 Fax status

Value Field Name Description

n1 UnableToRecoverFlag (0 no, 1 yes) Unable to recover lost packet

n2 IllegalHdlcFrameDetectedFlag (...) Illegal HDLC frame detected

n3 FaxExitWithNoMcfFrameFlag Fax exit with no MCF Frame

n4 HostTransmitOverRunFlag Channel received a buffer overrun

n5 HostTransmitUnderRunFlag Channel received a buffer underrun

n6 InternalErrorFlag Internal error

n7 ReceivedBadCommandFlag A bad command was received. Words 8

and 9 describe the bad command

n8 TimeOutErrorFlag A timeout error occurred

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 170CELLX 16.2

n9 T30RxState T.30 receive state

0 Init (initialization state)

1 CNG (calling tone)

2 CED (called terminal identifica-

tion)

3 V21 (switch to V21)

4 NSF (non-standard facilities)

5 NSC (non-standard (facilities)

command)

6 CSI (called subscriber identifi-

cation)

7 CIG (calling subscriber identifi-

cation)

8 DIS (digital identification signal)

9 DTC (digital transmit com-

mand)

10 NSS (non-standard services)

11 TSI (transmitting subscriber ID)

12 DCS (digital command signal)

13 CTC (continue to correct)

14 CRP (command repeat)

15 DCN (disconnect)

16 Pre-message response

17 Post-message response

18 Post-message command

19 VXX (receive illegal high-speed

signal)

20 TCF (training check function

21 Fax image

22 V.8 CI (calling indicator (re-

served))

23 V.8 CM (calling menu)

24 V.8 (joint menu)

n10 T30TxState T.30 transmit state. For values, see the

entry for T30RxState above.

n11 NumberOfTransferredPages Number of transmitted or received pag-

es positively confirmed by answering

fax.

n12 BadInputPacketId Sequence number of Bad Input UDPTL

packet, or the first two bytes of the in-

put TCP packet. The field is relevant if

the “Bad CMD” or the “Unable Recov-

er” bit is set.

n13 BadInputPacketTotalSize The total number of bytes in a bad fax

packet.

n14 FaxBitRate 0 Undefined or 300 bpx

(T.30 control signals)

1 2400 bps

2 4800 bps

3 7200 bps

4 9600 bps

5 12000 bps

6 14400 bps

7-15 Reserved

Table 10.28 Fax status (continued)

Value Field Name Description

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 171CELLX 16.2

The following output appears when the compression chip detects DTMF tones:

a[<controller]: ac49x ch <ch> ibs <dtmf> <dir> <mode> <lev> <dur>.

10.7.3.2 Internal protocol interface (to ISDN, mobile)

These trace outputs always begin with the keyword pstn, followed by the direction and the

message type. The message is then either concluded or other information follows:

n15 DemodulationStatus 0 EQM and Timing Off-

set fields are invalid.

1 EQM and Timing Off-

set fields are valid.

n16 EyeQualityMonitor (EQM) Eye Quality Monitor measure for TCF or

fax image. The value of 0 corresponds

to the best quality of demodulation.

Values greater than 100 have a nega-

tive influence on the quality of the fax

image.

n17 TimingOffsetPpm Timing Offset (ppm) recovered during

demodulation of TCF or fax image. The

offset is a short integer equal to the

sum of the sampling rate error and the

sending fax baud rate offset. The value

is in integers and and may not exceed

50 ppm in the following ranges during

fax transmission (T30TxState):

65535 – 65486 (-50ppm) 0 – 50

(+50ppm)

Table 10.28 Fax status (continued)

Value Field Name Description

Table 10.29 DTMF tone detection

Trace Output Description

<ch> Media channel

<dtmf> Detected DTMF tone in the stream or as per

RFC2833

<dir> Direction

0Coming from BRI/analog

1Coming from VoIP

<mode> 0Tone has ended

1Tone has been detected

<lev> Signal level in -dBm

<dur> Tone duration

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 172CELLX 16.2

pstn<type> <mt1> dad <num> oad <num> cc <value> cc <cc> id <id> c/c <ctrl>/

<ch> cr <cr>.

Output also appears when a call comes from the internal protocol interface and is assigned

to a VoIP profile. The characters appear in front of the colon in the routing entry:

pstnrcv get_voipcfg <voip profile> compr <list>

Assignment of media channel used for the internal interface and the ISDN call reference for

the VoIP call's appears as follows:

pstnrcv bchanind cr <cr> ch <chan> isdncr <icr>

Table 10.30 Internal protocol interface

Trace Output Description

<type> Direction from (rcv) or to (snd) the internal pro-

tocol interface.

<mt1> Message type written out; if a decimal number

appears, it will be translated as per Table 10.16.

<num> DAD<num> = called party number, OAD<num>

= calling party number.

<cc> Value for OAD field element:

20 OAD network type provided

40 OAD with sending complete

80 OAD presentation restricted

<id> Internal ident for the call leg.

<ctrl> Controller used (counting starts with 0).

<ch> Media channel used (counting starts with 1).

<cr> Internal call reference /, followed by 0 or call ref-

erence of the VoIP leg.

Table 10.31 Received from PSTN 1

Trace Output Description

<voip profile> Defines the VoIP profile to be used.

<list> Defines the compression algorithms offered.

Table 10.32 Received from PSTN 2

Trace Output Description

<cr> Call reference.

<chan> Media channel used for the internal protocol in-

terface (DSS1).

<icr> Call reference for the internal protocol interface

(DSS1).

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 173CELLX 16.2

10.7.3.3 H.245 messages

The following trace output is possible: h245<dir>(<tt>) cr <cr>.

Following this trace output, either a detailed description of the message and its corresponding

message type, including negotiating information, or trace output elements that are explained

later appear. The most important message types that contain further information elements

are as follows:

TerminalCapabilitySet peer=<comp> cfg=<comp>

TerminalCapabilitySet <comp>

Table 10.33 H.245 messages

Trace Output Description

<dir> The message's direction; rcv (incoming from

the peer) or snd (sent message).

<tt> H.245 transport type.

<cr> Internal call reference.

Table 10.34 Codec used

Trace Output Description

<comp> List of compression codecs offered (see Table

10.18), the list of the peer's codecs appears be-

hind peer, and cfg shows which codecs are de-

fined in the VoIP profile

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 174CELLX 16.2

The output syntax for the logical channel parameters is as follows:

OpenLogicalChannel cn=<cn> cpr=<comp> sessid=<sid> ctrl=<ip address>:<rtcp

port>

OpenLogicalChannelAck cn=<cn> sessid=<sid> media=<ip address>:<rtp port>

The trace output is as follows when the message type is not translated or is ignored:

h245<dir>(<tt>) cr <cr> unknown msg <hmt> <hmi>

Table 10.35 Logical channel parameters

Trace Output Description

<cn> H.245 channel number per H.225 connection.

<sid> Session ID.

<comp> Codec used (see Table 10.18).

<ip address> Protocol peer IP address.

<rtcp port> Port used for the protocol RTCP.

<rtp port> Port used for the protocol RTP.

Table 10.36 H.245 parameters

Trace Output Description

hmt The H.245 message type (multimedia system

control message type), (Table 10.37).

hmi The H.245 message ID (see Table 10.38, Table

10.39, Table 10.40, Table 10.41).

Table 10.37 Multimedia system control message types

ID Message

0 (Table 10.38) Request

1 (Table 10.39)Response

2 (Table 10.40) Command

3 (Table 10.41)Indication

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 175CELLX 16.2

Depending on the system control message type, one of the following message IDs appear:

Table 10.38 Message IDs for request message

ID Message

0 NonStandard

1MasterSlaveDetermination

2 TerminalCapabilitySet

3OpenLogicalChannel

4 CloseLogicalChannel

5RequestChannelClose

6 MultiplexEntrySend

7RequestMultiplexEntry

8 RequestMode

9RoundTripDelayRequest

10 MaintenanceLoopRequest

11 CommunicationModeRequest

12 ConferenceRequest

13 MultilinkRequest

14 LogicalChannelRateRequest

Table 10.39 Message IDs for response message

ID Message

0 NonStandard

1MasterSlaveDeterminationAck

2 MasterSlaveDeterminationReject

3TerminalCapabilitySetAck

4 TerminalCapabilitySetReject

5OpenLogicalChannelAck

6 OpenLogicalChannelReject

7CloseLogicalChannelAck

8 RequestChannelCloseAck

9RequestChannelCloseReject

10 MultiplexEntrySendAck

11 MultiplexEntrySendReject

12 RequestMultiplexEntryAck

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 176CELLX 16.2

13 RequestMultiplexEntryReject

14 RequestModeAck

15 RequestModeReject

16 RoundTripDelayResponse

17 MaintenanceLoopAck

18 MaintenanceLoopReject

19 CommunicationModeResponse

20 ConferenceResponse

21 MultilinkResponse

22 LogicalChannelRateAcknowledge

23 LogicalChannelRateReject

Table 10.40 Message IDs for command message

ID Message

0 NonStandard

1MaintenanceLoopOffCommand

2 SendTerminalCapabilitySet

3EncryptionCommand

4 FlowControlCommand

5EndSessionCommand

6 MiscellaneousCommand

7CommunicationModeCommand

8 ConferenceCommand

9h223MultiplexReconfiguration

10 NewATMVCCommand

11 MobileMultilinkReconfigurationCommand

Table 10.41 Message IDs For indication message

ID Message

0 NonStandard

1FunctionNotUnderstood

2 MasterSlaveDeterminationRelease

Table 10.39 Message IDs for response message (continued)

ID Message

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 177CELLX 16.2

10.7.3.4 RAS (registration, admission, status)

As a general rule, the most important terminal and gatekeeper messages appear written out

with the gatekeeper's IP address (<ip addr>).

Here is the output syntax for gatekeeper discovery requests:

H225 GatekeeperRequest to <ip addr> (s 131)

H225 GatekeeperConfirm <ip addr>

H225 GatekeeperReject <ip addr> reason <reason>

Here is the output syntax for endpoint registration requests:

3TerminalCapabilitySetRelease

4 OpenLogicalChannelConfirm

5RequestChannelCloseRelease

6 MultiplexEntrySendRelease

7RequestMultiplexEntryRelease

8 RequestModeRelease

9MiscellaneousIndication

10 JitterIndication

11 h223SkewIndication

12 NewATMVCIndication

13 UserInput

14 h2250MaximumSkewIndication

15 McLocationIndication

16 ConferenceIndication

17 VendorIdentification

18 FunctionNotSupported

19 MultilinkIndication

20 LogicalChannelRateRelease

21 FlowControlIndication

22 MobileMultilinkReconfigurationIndication

Table 10.41 Message IDs For indication message (continued)

ID Message

Table 10.42 RAS

Trace Output Description

<reason> Gatekeeper reject reason, see Table 10.46.

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 178CELLX 16.2

H225 GkRegistration to <ip addr>

H225 RegistrationConfirm <ip addr>

H225 RegistrationReject <ip addr> reason <reason>

Below you see the output syntax for bandwith availability indication:

H225 GkResourcesAvailableIndicate to <ip addr> (<act chan> <max chan>)

H225 ResourcesAvailableConfirm <ip addr>

Here is the output syntax for call admission requests:

H225 GkAdmission cr <cr> to <ip addr>

H225 AdmissionConfirm <ip addr> cr <cr>

H225 AdmissionReject <ip addr> reason <reason>

Here is the output syntax for call teardown requests:

H225 GkDisengage cr <cr> to <ip addr>

H225 DisengageConfirm <ip addr>

Here is the output syntax for registration release requests:

H225 UnregistrationRequest <ip addr>

H225 GkUnregistrationConf to <ip addr>

All other messages appear as follows:

H225 unknown msg from Gk <ip addr>: <code>

Table 10.43 Gatekeeper 1

Trace Output Description

<reason> Registration reject reason, see Table 10.47.

Table 10.44 Gatekeeper 2

Trace Output Description

<reason> Admission reject reason, see Table 10.48.

Table 10.45 Gatekeeper 3

Trace Output Description

<code> Unknown gatekeeper message, see Table 10.49.

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 179CELLX 16.2

Table 10.46 Gatekeeper reject reason

ID Reject Reason

0 resourceUnavailable

1terminalExcluded

2 invalidRevision

3undefinedReason

4 securityDenial

5genericDataReason

6 neededFeatureNotSupported

Table 10.47 Registration reject reason

ID Reject Reason

0 DiscoveryRequired

1InvalidRevision

2 InvalidCallSignalAddress

3InvalidRASAddress

4 DuplicateAlias

5InvalidTerminalType

6 UndefinedReason

7TransportNotSupported

8 TransportQOSNotSupported

9ResourceUnavailable

10 InvalidAlias

11 SecurityDenial

12 RullRegistrationRequired

13 AdditiveRegistrationNotSupported

14 InvalidTerminalAliases

15 GenericDataReason

16 NeededFeatureNotSupported

Table 10.48 Admission reject reason

ID Reject Reason

0 CalledPartyNotRegistered

1InvalidPermission

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 180CELLX 16.2

2 RequestDenied

3UndefinedReason

4 CallerNotRegistered

5RouteCallToGatekeeper

6 InvalidEndpointIdentifier

7ResourceUnavailable

8 SecurityDenial

9QosControlNotSupported

10 IncompleteAddress

11 AliasesInconsistent

12 RouteCallToSCN

13 ExceedsCallCapacity

14 CollectDestination

15 CollectPIN

16 GenericDataReason

17 NeededFeatureNotSupported

Table 10.49 Unknown gatekeeper messages

ID Message

0 GatekeeperRequest

1GatekeeperConfirm

2 GatekeeperReject

3RegistrationRequest

4 RegistrationConfirm

5RegistrationReject

6 UnregistrationRequest

7UnregistrationConfirm

8 UnregistrationReject

9AdmissionRequest

10 AdmissionConfirm

11 AdmissionReject

12 BandwidthRequest

Table 10.48 Admission reject reason (continued)

ID Reject Reason

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 181CELLX 16.2

10.7.3.5 ENUM output

This output is assigned to group i and occurs with Layer2 and Layer3 traces:

i[<controller>]: enum_query cr <CR> ch <CH>: <num> -> <length> <<answer

pattern>>.

13 BandwidthConfirm

14 BandwidthReject

15 DisengageRequest

16 DisengageConfirm

17 DisengageReject

18 LocationRequest

19 LocationConfirm

20 LocationReject

21 InfoRequest

22 InfoRequestResponse

23 NonStandardMessage

24 UnknownMessageResponse

25 RequestInProgress

26 ResourcesAvailableIndicate

27 ResourcesAvailableConfirm

28 InfoRequestAck

29 InfoRequestNak

30 ServiceControlIndication

31 ServiceControlResponse

Table 10.49 Unknown gatekeeper messages (continued)

ID Message

Table 10.50 ENUM output

Trace Output Description

<cr> Call reference.

<ch> Media channel.

<num> Phone number converted into ENUM domain

format.

<length> Length of the answer field in the DNS response

in bytes. 0 appears if the number was not found.

<answer pattern> Displays the DNS response. 0 appears if the num-

ber was not found.

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 182CELLX 16.2

10.7.3.6 Examples

The following examples are offline traces. You can generate them using the GATE Manager

or FTP commands. The filename is trace.log. The following cases appear in the examples:

Incoming H.323 call with FastStart (please see "Incoming H.323 call with FastStart" on

page 182 )

Outgoing H.323 call with FastStart (please see "Outgoing H.323 call with FastStart" on

page 183)

Fax call (please see "Fax call" on page 184)

Incoming H.323 call with FastStart

Example 10.6 Incoming H.323 call with FastStart

[15:25:13.65] i[02]: h225accept from 172.16.0.200 s 4

[15:25:13.75] y[02]: h225rcv tpkt msg 5 h225cr 8006 addr 172.16.0.200 pt 0

[15:25:13.75] y[02]: h225 decode rc 0, q931 msg 5 (0), len 364

[15:25:13.75] y[02]: h225rcv setup voipcfg addr 172.16.0.200 rc 0 <DF> compr EABG

[15:25:13.75] y[02]: h225rcv faststart <A1B1E1G0>

[15:25:13.75] y[02]: h225rcv setup oad 01 00 <111> <> dad 01 <123456> rad <> bc 038090a3 0101

[15:25:13.75] y[02]: h225rcv setup h225cr 8006 FS:1(E,172.16.0.200,29000) TUNN:1 H245:0(0,0)

[15:25:13.75] y[02]: h225rcv setup h225cr 8006 cr 7

[15:25:13.75] i[02]: pstnsnd setup dad 123456 oad 1 cr 7 s 4

[15:25:13.75] s[00]: 00 01 52 4c 08 02 00 08 05 04 03 80 90 a3 18 03 a1 83 87 6c 04 81 31 31 31 70 07 81

31 32 33 34 35 36 7d 02 91 81

[15:25:13.75] i[02]: pstnrcv connresp cr 7 acc 5 ch 1

[15:25:13.75] x[02]: h225snd callproc typ d cr 7 pri 0

[15:25:13.75] r[00]: 00 01 01 54

[15:25:13.75] r[00]: 02 01 4c 54 08 02 80 08 0d 18 03 a9 83 87

[15:25:13.75] s[00]: 02 01 01 4e

[15:25:14.33] r[00]: 02 01 4e 54 08 02 80 08 01

[15:25:14.33] s[00]: 02 01 01 50

[15:25:14.33] i[02]: pstnrcv alert cr 7 cls ff

[15:25:14.33] i[02]: rtp start cr 7 ch 1 li 1 ri 1 st 2 fx 0 cp E txm 1

[15:25:14.33] x[02]: h225snd callproc typ 1 cr 7 pri 8

[15:25:14.34] a[02]: vp start(201) ch=0 local=29000 remote=ac1000c8:29000 agg=0 pcm=0

[15:25:14.38] a[02]: vp rtcp 0: RR Tx pc 0 oc 0 ji -1 rt 0 fl -1 cl -1

[15:25:14.38] a[02]: vp ch 0: in 0 out 74

[15:25:15.57] r[00]: 02 01 50 54 08 02 80 08 07 29 05 06 03 18 0f 17 4c 06 01 81 31 37 33 31

[15:25:15.57] s[00]: 00 01 54 52 08 02 00 08 0f

[15:25:15.57] i[02]: pstnrcv connresp cr 7 acc 10 ch 255

[15:25:15.57] x[02]: h225snd callproc typ 7 cr 7 pri 0

[15:25:15.58] r[00]: 00 01 01 56

[15:25:17.01] a[02]: vp rtcp 0: SR Rx pc 110 oc 1816 ji 158 rt -1 fl 2 cl 1

[15:25:20.09] a[02]: vp rtcp 0: SR Tx pc 277 oc 5496 ji 164 rt 0 fl 0 cl 0

[15:25:20.09] a[02]: vp ch 0: in 18166 out 20646

[15:25:20.09] a[02]: vp rtcp 0: SR Rx pc 258 oc 4634 ji 208 rt -1 fl 0 cl 1

[15:25:23.32] a[02]: vp rtcp 0: SR Tx pc 441 oc 8776 ji 176 rt 0 fl 0 cl 0

[15:25:23.32] a[02]: vp ch 0: in 28966 out 32900

[15:25:24.68] y[02]: h225rcv tpkt msg 5a h225cr 8006 addr 172.16.0.200 pt 800e7800

[15:25:24.68] y[02]: h225 decode rc 0, q931 msg 5a (5), len 33

[15:25:24.68] y[02]: h225rcv relack h225cr 8006 FS:0(-,0,0) TUNN:1 H245:0(0,0)

[15:25:24.68] y[02]: h225rcv relack h225cr 8006 cau 0x10

[15:25:24.68] i[02]: rtp hold cr 7 ch 1

[15:25:24.68] s[00]: 00 01 56 52 08 02 00 08 45 08 02 80 90

[15:25:24.68] i[02]: h225 connection 4 terminated

[15:25:24.69] r[00]: 00 01 01 58

[15:25:25.89] r[00]: 02 01 52 58 08 02 80 08 4d

[15:25:25.89] s[00]: 00 01 58 54 08 02 00 08 5a

[15:25:25.94] i[02]: pstnrcv terminate connection (3201) cr 7 cau 1 err 16 state 17 ch 1 rsid 1

[15:25:25.94] i[02]: rtp stop cr 7 ch 1

[15:25:25.94] r[00]: 00 01 01 5a

[15:25:25.94] a[02]: vp ch 0: in 34096 out 38154

[15:25:25.94] a[02]: vp stop ch=0

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 183CELLX 16.2

Outgoing H.323 call with FastStart

Example 10.7 Outgoing H.323 call with FastStart

[15:04:09.12] r[00]: 02 01 46 48 08 02 22 54 05 04 03 80 90 a3 18 03 a9 83 94 6c 06 01 81 31 31 31 31 70

04 81 33 32 31 7d 02 91 81

[15:04:09.12] s[00]: 02 01 01 48

[15:04:09.12] s[00]: 00 01 48 48 08 02 a2 54 0d 18 03 a9 83 94

[15:04:09.12] i[02]: pstnrcv setup dad DF:321 oad 1111 cc 0 id 15d006

[15:04:09.12] i[02]: pstnrcv get_voipcfg <DF>

[15:04:09.12] i[02]: h225connect to 172.16.0.200 cr 6

[15:04:09.12] x[02]: h225snd setup dad 1 cr 6

[15:04:09.12] r[00]: 00 01 01 4a

[15:04:09.15] y[02]: h225rcv tpkt msg d h225cr 6 addr 172.16.0.200 pt 80412800

[15:04:09.15] y[02]: h225 decode rc 0, q931 msg d (11), len 32

[15:04:09.15] y[02]: h225rcv msg d (11) h225cr 6 FS:0(-,0,0) TUNN:1 H245:0(0,0)

[15:04:09.50] y[02]: h225rcv tpkt msg 1 h225cr 6 addr 172.16.0.200 pt 80412800

[15:04:09.50] y[02]: h225 decode rc 0, q931 msg 1 (3), len 121

[15:04:09.50] y[02]: h225rcv faststart <E1>

[15:04:09.50] y[02]: h225rcv alert h225cr 6 FS:1(E,172.16.0.200,29000) TUNN:1 H245:0(0,0)

[15:04:09.50] i[02]: rtp start cr 6 ch 1 li 1 ri 1 st 2 fx 0 cp E txm 1

[15:04:09.50] s[00]: 00 01 4a 48 08 02 a2 54 01 1e 02 80 88

[15:04:09.50] a[02]: vp start(201) ch=0 local=29000 remote=ac1000c8:29000 agg=0 pcm=0

[15:04:09.50] r[00]: 00 01 01 4c

[15:04:09.53] a[02]: vp rtcp 0: RR Tx pc 0 oc 0 ji -1 rt 0 fl -1 cl -1

[15:04:09.53] a[02]: vp ch 0: in 0 out 74

[15:04:11.79] y[02]: h225rcv tpkt msg 7 h225cr 6 addr 172.16.0.200 pt 80412800

[15:04:11.79] y[02]: h225 decode rc 0, q931 msg 7 (2), len 79

[15:04:11.79] y[02]: h225rcv connect h225cr 6 FS:0(-,0,0) TUNN:1 H245:0(0,0)

[15:04:11.79] i[02]: pstnsnd connect cr 6

[15:04:11.79] s[00]: 00 01 4c 48 08 02 a2 54 07

[15:04:11.80] r[00]: 02 01 48 4e 08 02 22 54 0f

[15:04:11.80] s[00]: 02 01 01 4a

[15:04:12.50] a[02]: vp rtcp 0: SR Rx pc 21 oc 394 ji 201 rt -1 fl 0 cl 0

[15:04:16.13] a[02]: vp rtcp 0: SR Tx pc 192 oc 3236 ji 196 rt 0 fl 0 cl 0

[15:04:16.13] a[02]: vp ch 0: in 14612 out 13796

[15:04:17.98] y[02]: h225rcv tpkt msg 5a h225cr 6 addr 172.16.0.200 pt 80412800

[15:04:17.98] y[02]: h225 decode rc 0, q931 msg 5a (5), len 33

[15:04:17.98] y[02]: h225rcv relack h225cr 6 FS:0(-,0,0) TUNN:1 H245:0(0,0)

[15:04:17.98] y[02]: h225rcv relack h225cr 6 cau 0x10

[15:04:17.98] i[02]: rtp hold cr 6 ch 1

[15:04:17.98] s[00]: 00 01 4e 4a 08 02 a2 54 45 08 02 80 90

[15:04:17.98] i[02]: h225 connection 4 terminated

[15:04:17.99] r[00]: 00 01 01 50

[15:04:18.04] r[00]: 02 01 4a 50 08 02 22 54 4d 08 02 84 90

[15:04:18.04] s[00]: 00 01 50 4c 08 02 a2 54 5a

[15:04:18.06] i[02]: pstnrcv terminate connection (3201) cr 6 cau 90 err 16 state 17 ch 1 rsid 1

[15:04:18.06] i[02]: rtp stop cr 6 ch 1

[15:04:18.06] r[00]: 00 01 01 52

[15:04:18.06] a[02]: vp ch 0: in 21288 out 20708

[15:04:18.06] a[02]: vp stop ch=0

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 184CELLX 16.2

Fax call

Example 10.8 Fax call

[16:00:40.44] i[02]: h225accept from 172.20.0.200 s 4

[16:00:40.49] y[02]: h225rcv tpkt msg 5 h225cr 8007 addr 172.20.0.200 pt 0

[16:00:40.49] y[02]: h225 decode rc 0, q931 msg 5 (0), len 251

[16:00:40.49] y[02]: h225rcv setup voipcfg addr 172.20.0.200 rc 0 <DF> compr EABG

[16:00:40.49] y[02]: h225rcv faststart <E0G0>

[16:00:40.49] y[02]: h225rcv setup oad 00 00 <> <> dad 01 <123456> rad <> bc 038090a3 0101

[16:00:40.49] y[02]: h225rcv setup h225cr 8007 FS:1(E,172.20.0.200,29000) TUNN:1 H245:0(0,0)

[16:00:40.49] y[02]: h225rcv setup h225cr 8007 cr 14

[16:00:40.49] i[02]: pstnsnd setup dad 123456 oad cr 14 s 4

[16:00:40.49] s[00]: 00 01 5a 54 08 02 00 09 05 04 03 80 90 a3 18 03 a1 83 88 70 07 81 31 32 33 34 35 36

7d 02 91 81

[16:00:40.49] i[02]: pstnrcv connresp cr 14 acc 5 ch 1

[16:00:40.49] x[02]: h225snd callproc typ d cr 14 pri 0

[16:00:40.50] r[00]: 02 01 54 5c 08 02 80 09 0d 18 03 a9 83 88

[16:00:40.67] r[00]: 02 01 56 5c 08 02 80 09 01

[16:00:40.67] i[02]: pstnrcv alert cr 14 cls ff

[16:00:40.67] i[02]: rtp start cr 14 ch 1 li 1 ri 1 st 2 fx 0 cp E txm 2

[16:00:40.67] x[02]: h225snd callproc typ 1 cr 14 pri 8

[16:00:40.70] a[02]: vp start(201) ch=0 local=29000 remote=ac1000c8:29000 agg=0 pcm=0

[16:00:40.74] a[02]: vp rtcp 0: RR Tx pc 0 oc 0 ji -1 rt 0 fl -1 cl -1

[16:00:40.74] a[02]: vp ch 0: in 0 out 74

[16:00:40.90] r[00]: 02 01 58 5c 08 02 80 09 07 29 05 06 03 18 0f 3b 4c 08 01 81 31 32 33 34 35 36

[16:00:40.90] s[00]: 00 01 5c 5a 08 02 00 09 0f

[16:00:40.90] i[02]: pstnrcv connresp cr 14 acc 10 ch 255

[16:00:40.90] x[02]: h225snd callproc typ 7 cr 14 pri 0

[16:00:41.98] a[02]: vp rtcp 0: SR Rx pc 134 oc 1340 ji 195 rt -1 fl 0 cl 0

[16:00:43.29] y[02]: h225rcv tpkt msg 62 h225cr 8007 addr 172.20.0.200 pt 80410800

[16:00:43.29] y[02]: h225 decode rc 0, q931 msg 62 (6), len 123

[16:00:43.29] y[02]: h225rcv facility h225cr 8007 FS:0(-,0,0) TUNN:1 H245:0(0,0)

[16:00:43.29] i[02]: h245rcv(1) cr 14 TerminalCapabilitySet peer=<EG> cfg=<EABG>

[16:00:43.29] i[02]: h245snd(1) cr 14 TerminalCapabilitySetAck

[16:00:43.29] i[02]: h245snd(1) cr 14 TerminalCapabilitySet <EABG>

[16:00:43.51] y[02]: h225rcv tpkt msg 62 h225cr 8007 addr 172.20.0.200 pt 80410800

[16:00:43.51] y[02]: h225 decode rc 0, q931 msg 62 (6), len 63

[16:00:43.51] y[02]: h225rcv facility h225cr 8007 FS:0(-,0,0) TUNN:1 H245:0(0,0)

[16:00:43.51] i[02]: h245rcv(1) cr 14 TerminalCapabilitySetAck

[16:00:43.72] y[02]: h225rcv tpkt msg 62 h225cr 8007 addr 172.20.0.200 pt 80410800

[16:00:43.72] y[02]: h225 decode rc 0, q931 msg 62 (6), len 74

[16:00:43.72] y[02]: h225rcv facility h225cr 8007 FS:0(-,0,0) TUNN:1 H245:0(0,0)

[16:00:43.72] i[02]: h245rcv(1) cr 14 RequestMode t38=1

[16:00:43.72] i[02]: h245snd(1) cr 14 RequestModeAck

[16:00:43.73] i[02]: h245snd(1) cr 14 CloseLogicalChannel cn=1

[16:00:43.73] i[02]: h245snd(1) cr 14 OpenLogicalChannel cn=1 cpr=G sessid=1 ctrl=172.20.0.100:29001

[16:00:43.73] y[02]: h225rcv tpkt msg 62 h225cr 8007 addr 172.20.0.200 pt 80410800

[16:00:43.73] y[02]: h225 decode rc 0, q931 msg 62 (6), len 68

[16:00:43.73] y[02]: h225rcv facility h225cr 8007 FS:0(-,0,0) TUNN:1 H245:0(0,0)

[16:00:43.73] i[02]: h245rcv(1) cr 14 CloseLogicalChannel cn=1 (1)

[16:00:43.73] i[02]: h245snd(1) cr 14 CloseLogicalChannelAck cn=1

[16:00:43.73] y[02]: h225rcv tpkt msg 62 h225cr 8007 addr 172.20.0.200 pt 80410800

[16:00:43.73] y[02]: h225 decode rc 0, q931 msg 62 (6), len 92

[16:00:43.73] y[02]: h225rcv facility h225cr 8007 FS:0(-,0,0) TUNN:1 H245:0(0,0)

[16:00:43.73] i[02]: h245rcv(1) cr 14 OpenLogicalChannel cn=1 cpr=G sessid=1 ctrl=172.20.0.200:29001

[16:00:43.73] i[02]: h245snd(1) cr 14 OpenLogicalChannelAck cn=1 sessid=1 media=172.20.0.100:29000

[16:00:43.73] y[02]: h225rcv tpkt msg 62 h225cr 8007 addr 172.20.0.200 pt 80410800

[16:00:43.73] y[02]: h225 decode rc 0, q931 msg 62 (6), len 64

[16:00:43.73] y[02]: h225rcv facility h225cr 8007 FS:0(-,0,0) TUNN:1 H245:0(0,0)

[16:00:43.73] i[02]: h245rcv(1) cr 14 CloseLogicalChannelAck cn=1

[16:00:43.73] y[02]: h225rcv tpkt msg 62 h225cr 8007 addr 172.20.0.200 pt 80410800

[16:00:43.73] y[02]: h225 decode rc 0, q931 msg 62 (6), len 83

[16:00:43.73] y[02]: h225rcv facility h225cr 8007 FS:0(-,0,0) TUNN:1 H245:0(0,0)

[16:00:43.73] i[02]: h245rcv(1) cr 14 OpenLogicalChannelAck cn=1 sessid=1 media=172.20.0.200:29000

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 185CELLX 16.2

10.7.4 Remote output

This trace option provides output for communication with the GATE Manager or NMS. To ac-

tivate this option, activate the section Remote in the GATE Manager. You can choose the

depth of the trace output: Error is limited to error messages; Debug provides information;

Detail provides the entire packet.

Output is defined with a g, and the port number is 99.

The following output shows an established GATE Manager connection:

g[99]:moip: accept rc=2 ipad=<ip address> port=<port>.

The following output shows the direction (In/Out) for the packet and the size.

[16:00:43.73] i[02]: rtp start cr 14 ch 1 li 1 ri 1 st 3 fx 0 cp G txm 2

[16:00:43.73] i[02]: rtp start cr 14 ch 1 li 1 ri 1 st 3 fx 1 cp G txm 2

[16:00:43.74] a[02]: vp start2 ch=0 remote=ac1000c8:29000

[16:00:43.74] a[02]: vp start(401) ch=0 local=29000 remote=ac1000c8:29000 agg=0 pcm=0

[16:00:47.70] a[02]: vp rtcp 0: SR Tx pc 13 oc 352 ji 132 rt 0 fl 0 cl 0

[16:00:53.63] a[02]: vp rtcp 0: RR Tx pc 13 oc 352 ji -1 rt 0 fl -1 cl -1

[16:00:59.14] a[02]: vp rtcp 0: RR Tx pc 13 oc 352 ji -1 rt 0 fl -1 cl -1

[16:01:02.12] a[02]: vp rtcp 0: RR Tx pc 13 oc 352 ji -1 rt 0 fl -1 cl -1

[16:01:07.16] a[02]: vp rtcp 0: RR Tx pc 13 oc 352 ji -1 rt 0 fl -1 cl -1

[16:01:11.82] a[02]: vp rtcp 0: RR Tx pc 13 oc 352 ji -1 rt 0 fl -1 cl -1

[16:01:18.06] a[02]: vp rtcp 0: RR Tx pc 13 oc 352 ji -1 rt 0 fl -1 cl -1

[16:01:21.15] a[02]: vp rtcp 0: RR Tx pc 13 oc 352 ji -1 rt 0 fl -1 cl -1

[16:01:26.10] a[02]: vp rtcp 0: RR Tx pc 13 oc 352 ji -1 rt 0 fl -1 cl -1

[16:01:28.89] a[02]: vp rtcp 0: RR Tx pc 13 oc 352 ji -1 rt 0 fl -1 cl -1

[16:01:33.14] y[02]: h225rcv tpkt msg 5a h225cr 8007 addr 172.20.0.200 pt 80410800

[16:01:33.14] y[02]: h225 decode rc 0, q931 msg 5a (5), len 33

[16:01:33.14] y[02]: h225rcv relack h225cr 8007 FS:0(-,0,0) TUNN:1 H245:0(0,0)

[16:01:33.14] y[02]: h225rcv relack h225cr 8007 cau 0x10

[16:01:33.14] i[02]: rtp hold cr 14 ch 1

[16:01:33.15] s[00]: 00 01 5e 5a 08 02 00 09 45 08 02 80 90

[16:01:33.15] i[02]: h225 connection 4 terminated

[16:01:33.19] r[00]: 02 01 5a 60 08 02 80 09 4d

[16:01:33.19] s[00]: 00 01 60 5c 08 02 00 09 5a

[16:01:33.19] i[02]: pstnrcv terminate connection (3201) cr 14 cau 1 err 16 state 17 ch 1 rsid 1

[16:01:33.19] i[02]: rtp stop cr 14 ch 1

[16:01:33.23] a[02]: vp ch 0: in 85542 out 4346

[16:01:33.23] a[02]: vp stop ch=0

Example 10.8 Fax call (continued)

Table 10.51 Remote output

Trace Output Description

<ip address> Remote system’s IP address with GATE Manager.

<port> Origination port for the GATE Manager connec-

tion.

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 186CELLX 16.2

g[99]:moip: <direction> <length>.

All other trace output appears in detail mode in ASCII and are also translated.

10.7.5 SMTP trace output

This trace option provides output for communication with the mail server that occurs when

status information or files are sent, or in the other direction, which e-mails are received and

converted to SMS or USSD.

To activate this option, activate the section Mail in the GATE Manager. You can choose the

depth of the trace output: Error is limited to error messages; Debug provides information;

Detail provides the entire packet.

Output is defined with a m, and the port number is 99.

Sending files or status information

Here is the global message output syntax:

m[99]:mail: sendmail (<length>)

The detailed message output looks like this:

m[99]:mail: sendmail: <Faccount> <ip address> <Taccount> <domain> <sub-

ject> <content>.

Table 10.52 Remote output

Trace Output Description

<direction> recv Packets received from the re-

mote system

send Packets sent to the remote sys-

tem

write Output for communication with

the internal remote interface

read Output for communication

from the internal remote inter-

face

<length> Data length in bytes.

Table 10.53 SMTP output: sending files or status info

Trace Output Description

<length> Data length in bytes.

Table 10.54 SMTP output: sending fles or status info

Trace Output Description

<Faccount> Sender’s e-mail account (cdr, alarm, file, and so

on).

<ip address> SMTP server’s IP address.

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 187CELLX 16.2

All other trace output appears in detail mode in ASCII and are also translated.

Receiving e-mail messages and sending them as SMS or USSD

The following output displays communication of an incoming SMTP connection:

m[99]:mail: accept: ipad=<ip address> port=<port>

The following output displays which packets are sent to the SMTP peer:

m[99]:mail: mysend <<content>>

All other trace output appears in detail mode in ASCII and are also translated.

The following output displays which packets are received from the SMTP peer:

m[99]:mail: recv (<length>)

All other trace output appears in detail mode in ASCII and are also translated.

The following output shows that the SMTP connection is being closed:

m[99]:mail: terminate_session

<Taccount> Recipient’s e-mail account.

<domain> Recipient’s domain.

<subject> Content of the subject field; serial number of the

sender system.

<content> Content of the message’s body.

Table 10.54 SMTP output: sending fles or status info (continued)

Trace Output Description

Table 10.55 SMTP output: receiving e-mail and sending as SMS or USSD

Trace Output Description

<ip address> The SMTP peer system’s IP address.

<port> The SMTP peer system’s origination port.

Table 10.56 SMTP output: receiving e-mail and sending as SMS or USSD

Trace Output Description

<content> Content of the transmitted packet.

Table 10.57 SMTP Output: receiving e-mail and sending as SMS or USSD

Trace Output Description

<length> Data length in bytes.

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 188CELLX 16.2

The mail module now converts the e-mail message to the internal format and then sent as

SMS or USSD. Bulk mail (several recipient entries for the same e-mail) appear as individual

messages:

m[99]:mail: newMail2Host r=<Taccount> f=<Faccount> s=<subject> d=<content>

The following output appears when the message has been successfully sent:

m[99]:mail: rcvmail <Faccount> -> <Taccount>, done

This is converted in the confirmation message, with the subject sent. The output in the sub-

sequent communication with the mail server are identical to those described above in

Chapter Sending files or status information.

The following output appears when errors occur during transmission of the SMS or USSD

message:

Message transmission was faulty and will be repeated:

m[99]:mail: rcvmail <Faccount> -> <Taccount>, failed, will retry

(<num>)

Retried message transmission was also faulty, and an e-mail will be generated:

m[99]:mail: rcvmail <Faccount> -> <Taccount>, failed <num> times

The output in the subsequent communication with the mail server are identical to those de-

scribed above in Chapter Sending files or status information.

Receiving SMS or USSD and sending as e-mail

The following output shows the internal format when an SMS or USSD message is sent to the

mail module. This output is generated when transmission of the SMS or USSD message was

not possible:

m[99]:mail: DATA_IND (<length>).

All other trace output appears in detail mode in ASCII and are also translated. The output in

the subsequent communication with the mail server are identical to those described above in

Chapter Sending files or status information.

Table 10.58 SMTP output: receiving e-mail and sending as SMS or USSD

Trace Output Description

<Faccount> One entry from the sender’s To field.

<Taccount> Content of the From field.

<subject> Content of the subject field; usually not used.

<content> Content of the message’s body; is sent as SMS or

USSD.

Table 10.59 SMTP output: transmission error

Trace Output Description

<num> Current number of retries.

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 189CELLX 16.2

10.7.6 Number portability trace output

This trace option provides output for the communication with the iMNP database. To activate

this option, activate the section Number Portability in the GATE Manager. Output is defined

with an n, and the port number is 99.

The following output appears when the system sets up a TCP session with the iMNP is being

set up:

n[99]:np: connecting to <ip addr>.

The following output shows that the connection has been established:

n[99]:np: connect to <ip addr> ok.

The following output shows that the connection attempt failed:

n[99]:np: connect to <ip addr> failed.

The following output shows a keep alive packet from the iMNP to keep the TCP session open:

n[99]:np: recv <>.

Response to a number portability request that results in the call’s routing:

n[99]:np: recv <N<num>>.

10.7.7 DTMF tone trace output

Output about the setup of connections with the DTMF module and DTMF tone detection are

debugged. The output differentiates between the groups err and inf. Output is defined

with a d, and the port number is that of the virtual DTMF controller:

The following output shows incoming call setup to the DTMF module:

Table 10.60 Number portability output: connection with iMNP

Trace Output Description

<ip address> The iMNP system’s IP address.

Table 10.61 Number portability output: response

Trace Output Description

<num> Ported or unported number provided by the da-

tabase.

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 190CELLX 16.2

d[<ctrl>]: dtmf: msg <call state>, unknown id <id>, from 14.

The following output shows transmitted signaling messages depending on the call state:

d[<ctrl>]: dtmf <message type> <id> <call state> 0.

The following output shows that the media channel has been designated for DTMF tone de-

tection:

d[<ctrl>]: dtmf send_alloc <b_chan id_unset> <ctrl>/<b chan>.

The following output shows the status for the media channel will is/was used for DTMF tone

recognission:

Table 10.62 DTMF output: incoming call setup

Trace Output Description

<ctrl> The virual controller’s running number.

<call state> 3101 Incoming setup

3201 Disconnect request

<id> Call identification number.

Table 10.63 DTMF output: signaling messages

Trace Output Description

<message type> Send_d_connect For setup acknowledge

and connect.

send_alert_ind For alert.

send_disconnect For disconnect

<id> Call identification number.

<call state> 3110 Incoming setup

3102 Disconnect request

3804 Alert

3202 Disconnect confirmation

Table 10.64 DTMF output: media channel designation

Trace Output Description

<b chan> Internal media channel used.

<b_chan id_unset> Media channel identification (in unset state).

10 System maintenance and software update

Page 191CELLX 16.2

d[<ctrl>]: dtmf: msg <msg>, id <b_chan id>, from 1, id <id>/<b_chan

id_unset>.

The following output shows the output for negotiated DTMF tones:

d[<ctrl>]: dtmf send_info_ind <id> <<dtmf tone>>.

Table 10.65 DTMF output: media channel designation

Trace Output Description

<msg> 502 Media channel confirmation

102 Connect confirmation

602 Media channel free confirma-

tion

11 Feature packages

Page 193CELLX 16.2

The feature packages are modular expansion applications that provide services in addition to

those offered with the standard software. Feature packages can be activated separately or in

combination with one another, so that you can design your system according to your own

needs.

The following feature packages are available:

Two Stage Dialing/Callback Services (please see Chapter 11.2 on page 194)

Least Cost Routing (please see Chapter 11.3 on page 200)

Online Traffic Monitor (please see Chapter 11.4 on page 206)

Ported Number Screening (please see Chapter 11.5 on page 213)

Call recording (please see Chapter 11.6 on page 215)

11.1 Activating the license

Each feature package requires a license. Once you have ordered a feature package, you can

activate the license:

The /boot/ directory of each system contains a file called license.key, which contains infor-

mation on the system’s ID, the included components, which feature packages are active and

the license number:

You will receive a new license.key file any time you order a new license package. Simply save

the new file, overwriting the old file, and restart the system.

Example 11.1 Activating the license

[IDENTIFICATION]

SYSTEM: TELES.iGATE

SERNO: VT810011

AUTOR: create Wed Sep 09 15:01:09 2006

[COMPONENTS]

...

CARD99:11 d1 S0 PB900034

...

[FEATURES]

PRI:Max

GSM:Max

IP:Max

VoIP:Max

SIM manager: On

DDI and call back: Off

least cost routing: On

statistics and CDR: On

SMS gateway: On

ported number screening: Off

roaming: Off

[SIGNATURE]

00000000000license0number00000000000

Deleting or making changes in the license.key file will delete any feature package licenses,

causing the system to revert to the standard configuration!

11 Feature packages

Page 194CELLX 16.2

11.2 Two stage dialing/callback server functionality

This package contains money-saving features that expand the functionality of your to include

DTMF services (two stage dialing) and callback capability. It is particularly useful for companies

with employees who travel often, because it eliminates expensive roaming fees.

In a two stage dialing scenario, the caller dials a number which the connects with the inte-

grated DTMF platform. He then enters the destination number via DTMF. The establishes the

connection to the destination number.

Callback takes place, when the initial call is released and the calling party is called back in a

second call as a response.

Depending on your , various intelligent solutions as a call server are possible. The most impor-

tant scenarios and properties are described here. The scenarios can also be combined to suit

your needs.

Announcements

Two stage dialing with DTMF

Callback with DTMF and OAD as callback number

Callback with DTMF and preconfigured callback number

Callback to OAD with predefined destination number

Callback with PIN and preconfigured callback number

To indicate that the number transmitted using DTMF tones is complete, the caller can press

the # key. Otherwise, there is a default timer set to 5 seconds, after which DTMF transmission

will automatically end.

To correct a wrong destination number, the caller can press the * key. The DTMF announce-

ment is replayed and the destination number can be entered again.

Activating DTMF tone recognition

The can recognize DTMF tones and use them to initiate calls. In the pabx.cfg, enter a virtual

DTMF controller, as described in Table 5.14. The corresponding Subscriber entry contains the

options:

TRANSPARENT ROUTER CHMAX[5]

The 5 refers to the maximum number of simultaneous channels used for DTMF recognition.

The must be restarted to activate this configuration.

CDR entries for calls routed as callback with DTMF include the connection times for the A and

B parties. The times are separated by a slash (/). If no connection is established to the B party,

an entry recording the A party’s connection time is generated in the failed.log file.

Example 11.2 Activating DTMF tone recognition

...

Controller20 = 41 DTMF

...

Subscriber20 = TRANSPARENT ROUTER CHMAX[5]

...

11 Feature packages

Page 195CELLX 16.2

11.2.1 Announcements

An announcement can be played immediately after the connection has been established. The

announcement’s file format must be G.711. A converter tool to convert wave files to the

G.711 format is available from TELES free of charge. The announcement can be defined in

the virtual DTMF controller’s Subscriber line using the following entry in the pabx.cfg file:

DTMF[<sec>,/<dir>/<file>]

<sec> refers to the maximum number of seconds after which the connection to the DTMF

controller is teared down. Please enter a time that is longer than the announcement time. The

entry <dir> refers to the directory in which the announcement file is saved. The directory

name can be boot or data. The file extension must be 711.

The Subscriber line can be extended to contain up to 26 additional announcement files:

DTMF[<sec>,/<dir>/<defaultfile>,/<dir>/<file_a>,/<dir>/<file_b>,...,/

<dir>/<file_z>]

A mapping needs to be added to the route.cfg file for every announcement to map to the

port that is necessary for recognizing DTMF tones:

MapAll<number>=<DTMFport>DTMF (for the default announcement file)

MapAll<number>=<DTMFport>DTMFa (for file_a)

...

MapAll<number>=<DTMFport>DTMFz (for file_z)

To stop the announcement after the entry of the first digit, a [ needs to be added behind

DTMF to the respective MapAll parameter:

MapAll<number>=<DTMFport>DTMF[

In this example, a maximum of 5 channels can recognize DTMF tones and change them into

dialing data. The default announcement is named DTMF1.711 and must be available in the

boot directory. There is one additional announcement file named DTMF2.711 which must

also be available in the boot directory. Users calling in from GSM hear the default announce-

ment. After entry of the first digit, the annoucement stops. Calls coming in from analog

sources trigger the announcement a stored in file_a.

11.2.2 Two stage dialing with DTMF

The user dials a number in the system that is connected with the virtual DTMF controller. He

then enters the number he wants to be connected to.

Make the following entries in the route.cfg to connect a call directly:

MapAll<number>=<DTMFport>DTMF

Maps the calls to the DTMF port.

Example 11.3 Announcements configuration in the pabx.cfg

Controller20 = 41 DTMF

Subscriber20 = TRANSPARENT ROUTER DTMF[30,/boot/DTMF1.711,/boot/DTMF2.711]

CHMAX[5]

Example 11.4 Announcements configuration in the route.cfg

Restrict20 = IN1

Restrict10 = IN2

MapAllIN1 = 41DTMF[

MapAllIN2 = 41DTMFa[

11 Feature packages

Page 196CELLX 16.2

MapAllDLA=<port>

Sends all digits that have been entered as DTMF to the specified port. To prevent abuse, the

following entry can be made to configure a PIN before the actual call number:

MapAllDLA<pin>=<port>

In addition, the mapping to the DTMF port can be extended by the capital letters C to Z to

send the digits to different ports:

MapAll<number>=<DTMFport>DTMFC

MapAll<number>=<DTMFport>DTMFD

...

MapAll<number>=<DTMFport>DTMFZ

must be combined with:

MapAllDLC=<port>

MapAllDLD=<port>

...

MapAllDLZ=<port>

In the following example, all calls coming from GSM are connected to the virtual DTMF con-

troller and the call that comes in as DTMF tones is directed to port 9. Calls to the number

12345 are connected to the virtual DTMF controller and are directed to port 10.

In the folllowing example, two announcement files are listed in the pabx.cfg. All calls com-

ing from GSM are connected to the virtual DTMF controller and the default announcement

(DTMF1.711) is played. The call that comes in as DTMF tones is directed to port 9. Calls to the

number 12345 are connected to the virtual DTMF controller and the DTMF2.711 announce-

ment is played. The call that comes in as DTMF tones is directed to port 10.

Example 11.5 Two stage dialing with DTMF 1

Restrict20=IN

MapAllIN=41DTMF

MapAllDLA=9

MapAll12345=41DTMFC

MapAllDLC=10

Example 11.6 Two stage dialing with DTMF 1 (pabx.cfg)

Controller20 = 41 DTMF

Subscriber20 = TRANSPARENT ROUTER DTMF[30,/boot/DTMF1.711,/boot/DTMF2.711]

CHMAX[5]

Example 11.7 Two stage dialing with DTMF 1 (route.cfg)

Restrict20=IN

MapAllIN=41DTMF

MapAllDLA=9

MapAll12345=41DTMFaC

MapAllDLC=10

11 Feature packages

Page 197CELLX 16.2

11.2.3 Callback with DTMF and OAD as callback number

The user calls a number to trigger callback to his calling number (OAD). After the alert tone,

the system or the user hangs up and the user is called back. When he takes the call, he is

requested by announcement to enter the destination number using DTMF tones. The connec-

tion to the destination number is then established.

The following entries in route.cfg will initiate callback to the calling party’s number:

MapAll<number>=CALLB

This entry contains the number that needs to be called to trigger callback.

MapCallbackAlert=<sec>

If this optional parameter is configured, the will release the trigger call after the given number

of seconds. The default value is 180. If you enter the value 1, no alert tone is sent. For all other

entries an alert tone is sent. The range of possible values is between 1 and 255.

MapCallbackDelay=<sec>

If MapCallbackAlert=<sec> is configured, MapCallbackDelay=<sec> is needed to define

the time between the release of the trigger call and the call back. The parameter is used to

set up the call back. A callback delay of 2 to 5 seconds is recommended.

MapCallbackRejCause=<cause value>

If this optional parameter is configured, the trigger call to the gateway is rejected with the

here entered cause value. The default value is 16 (Normal call clearing). The values 1 - 127 are

possible. This parameter is not available for mobile ports.

MapAllCB=<port>

Calls back the calling party’s number via the defined port.

MapAllDTMF=<DTMFport>DTMF

Maps to the port that is needed for recognizing DTMF tones.

MapAllDLA=<port>

Sends all digits that have been entered as DTMF to the specified port.

The letter “B” in CALLB can be replaced by any capital letter from C to Z to allow for different

routings. Correspondingly, “B” in MapAllCB and “A” in MapAllDLA need to be replaced by

a matching capital letter C to Z:

MapAll<number>=CALLC

MapAll<number>=CALLD

...

MapAll<number>=CALLZ

corresponds with:

MapAllCC=<port>

MapAllCD=<port>

...

MapAllCZ=<port>

corresponds with:

MapAllDLC=<port>

MapAllDLD=<port>

...

MapAllDLZ=<port>

MapCallbackMaxDuration=<sec>

This optional parameter defines the length of time that the system tries to call back the user.

The entered value can be between 1 and 180. If the time limit has been exceeded, the system

terminates the call.

CallbackOAD=<OAD>

Configure this optional parameter in the [System] section of the pabx.cfg file to display the

here defined OAD when the gateway calls back the user. Not possible for mobile ports.

11 Feature packages

Page 198CELLX 16.2

In this scenario, there is no need to adjust the MapAllDTMF=<DTMFport>DTMF command.

In this example, the number 123 is called to trigger a callback. After 3 seconds the releases

the call. The calling party’s number (OAD) is called back via port 9. The user is requested to

enter the destination number as DTMF. The digits that come in as DTMF are sent to port 9.

This example is similar to the above one except that the port for the destination call is now

port 10. The capital letter “C” is used in the mappings to allow for this additional routing.

11.2.4 Callback with DTMF and preconfigured callback number

This feature is especially useful when the calling party’s number is not transmitted. The user

calls a predefined number that is mapped to a defined callback number. An alerting takes

place. The user hangs up and is called back at the defined callback number. After the user

has accepted the call, he must enter the destination number via DTMF. The connection is set

up when he finishes dialing.

Make the following entries in route.cfg to initiate callback to a fixed number:

MapAll<number>=CALL<callback number>

MapAllDTMF=<DTMFport>DTMF

MapAllDLA=<port>

You need to activate digit collection if the call goes to the mobile network or VoIP (using SIP)

Example 11.8 Callback with DTMF and OAD as callback number 1

MapAll123=CALLB

MapCallbackAlert=3

MapCallbackDelay=5

MapAllCB=9

MapAllDTMF=41DTMF

MapAllDLA=9

MapCallbackMaxDuration=180

Example 11.9 Callback with DTMF and OAD as callback number 2

MapAll456=CALLC

MapCallbackAlert=3

MapCallbackDelay=5

MapAllCC=9

MapAllDTMF=41DTMF

MapAllDLC=10

MapCallbackMaxDuration=60

11 Feature packages

Page 199CELLX 16.2

In the following example, calls to the number 123 are connected with the number 03012345.

The number that comes in as DTMF is directed to port 9.

11.2.5 Callback to OAD with predefined destination number

The user calls a predefined number in the system. An alerting occurs. The user hangs up and

is called back on his calling party number (OAD). After the user accepts the call, he is connect-

ed to a fixed, preconfigured number (e.g. operator or corporate central office).

Make the following entries in route.cfg:

MapAll<number>=CALLB

MapAllCB=<port>

MapAllDTMF=<port><destination number>

Different routings are possible by using the capital letters “C” to “Z”.

In the following example, the caller dials 123456 and his OAD is called back through port 9.

He is then connected with the operator’s number 0 through port 10.

In the following example, the caller dials 987654 and his OAD is called back through port 9.

He is then connected to the destination number 03011111 through port 9.

11.2.6 Callback with PIN and preconfigured callback number

The user dials a number in the system that is connected to the DTMF platform. He then enters

a predefined PIN that maps him to a predefined fixed number that is to be called back. He

then hangs up. After he takes the callback, he can enter the destination number using DTMF

tones.

Make the following entries in route.cfg:

MapAll<number>=<DTMFport>DTMF

MapAllDLA<pin>=CALL<port><callback number>

MapAllDTMF=<DTMFport>DTMF

MapAllDLA=<port>

Example 11.10 Callback with DTMF and preconfigured callback number

MapAll123=CALL903012345

MapAllDTMF=41DTMF

MAPAllDLA=9

Example 11.11 Callback to OAD with predefined destination number 1

MAPAll123456=CALLB

MapAllCB=9

MapAllDTMF=100

Example 11.12 Callback to OAD with predefined destination number 2

MAPAll987654=CALLC

MapAllCC=9

MapAllDTMFC=903011111

11 Feature packages

Page 200CELLX 16.2

The number 123456 is dialed and the PIN 123# is entered. The call is then connected to the

pre-configured callback number 004930123456 through port 9. After connect, the destina-

tion number is entered using DTMF and transmitted through port 9.

The number 987654 is dialed and the PIN 456# is entered. The call is then connected to the

pre-configured callback number 004930987654 through port 9. The capital letter “C” is

used in the mappings to allow for this additional callback number. After connect, the desti-

nation number is entered using DTMF and transmitted through port 9.

11.3 Least cost routing

s are connected between the customer’s private branch exchange (PBX) and the public tele-

phone network (ISDN) and/or VoIP. The customer saves connection charges and can effort-

lessly and automatically connect to the corporate network as needed using one of six routing

methods:

Carrier selection

Dedicated lines

Direct line access with subaddressing

Direct line access with DTMF

Callback with subaddressing

Callback with DTMF

This manual contains information only on carrier selection. If you would like to configure any

other variation, please contact TELES.

Calls are routed transparently for the PBX and its users. s can generate charges and route calls

using alternate settings in case of network failures. The provider can access the system via

ISDN for routine maintenance and monitoring.

The following additional services are supported by this feature package:

Generation of charges

Time-controlled configuration

Alternative routing

Example 11.13 Callback with PIN and preconfigured callback number 1

MAPAll123456=41DTMF

MapAllDLA123=CALL9004930123456

MapAllDTMF=41DTMF

MapAllDLA=9

Example 11.14 Callback with PIN and preconfigured callback number 2

MAPAll987654=41DTMFC

MapAllDLC456=CALL9004930987654

MapAllDTMF=41DTMF

MapAllDLA=9

The user must enter a # following the PIN. Otherwise the callback to the predefined number

will not take place.

11 Feature packages

Page 201CELLX 16.2

11.3.1 Carrier selection

Carrier selection is currently one of the most commonly used routing methods supported by

the . In the , this routing process also includes direct calls into the mobile network or through

a VoIP network. That means the system is a full-fledged second generation LCR.

11.3.1.1 Routing entries

Use the MapAll command to route calls using Carrier Selection.

Use the following syntax for connections routed via the provider:

MapAll<AreaCode>=9<CarrierSelection><AreaCode>

where <AreaCode> is the number or number range to be routed and <CarrierSelection> is

the access number required to reach the provider’s network.

For unrouted connections (placed via the public telephone network), use:

MapAll<AreaCode>=9<AreaCode>

To block undesired carrier selection prefixes use:

MapAll<CarrierSelection>=&91;(Busy signal)

In the following example, calls to international destinations are terminated through the VoIP

interface. The profile names iG1 and iG2 in the routing entries refer to different VoIP carriers.

All other national long distance and local calls are routed through an alternative carrier

(01019). All calls from the PSTN to the PBX are put through transparently.

11.3.2 Alternative routing settings

Alternative routing refers to the ability to establish connections using a different (alternative)

network in case of provider failure (e.g. all mobile controllers are in use). Alternative routing

ensures uninterrupted operation of the attached PBX. In such cases, connections are often

made via the public network using the Redirect command:

MapAll<num>=<port><num>

Redirect3<port><num>=<placeholder>

Example 11.15 Least cost routing 1

MapAll001=40iG1:001

MapAll0044=40iG2:0044

...

MapAll01=90101901

MapAll02=90101902

...

MapAll09=90101909

MapAll1=9010191

MapAll2=9010192

...

MapAll9=9010199

Restrict9=10

Be sure to enter phone numbers in the routing file in ascending order.

11 Feature packages

Page 202CELLX 16.2

MapAll<placeholder>=<alt port><num>

11.3.3 Charge models

s can either generate charge information or transmit received charges from the public or cor-

porate networks to the attached PBX. Charge simulation is achieved using variables, which

ensure a great degree of flexibility for the implementation of many different charge models

including:

Charge units per time unit

Flat rate (initial charge without time interval)

Initial charge plus time interval

Initial charge plus time interval after delay

Time interval and/or flat rate plus received charges

Received charges only or no charge information

Initial toll-free period with retroactive charge generation afterwards

Price-per-minute (with whole second accuracy)

In this chapter, unit means that charge information is transmitted as a whole number value,

and currency means that the charge information is sent as a currency amount (e.g. EUR

3.45). The charge impulse generation options can be set for each mapping by adding charge-

specific arguments to the MapAll commands, as shown below. The use of each variable is ex-

plained in Table 11.1.

MapAllsrc=dst time start/wait and

MapCallBackOutprovsrc=dst mode time start/wait.

To generate charge impulses from the first second of the call, the following parameter needs

to be configured in the [System] section of the pabx.cfg file:

InitialCharge=On

Example 11.16 Least cost routing 2

MapAll01555=2621201555

Redirect32621201555=A

MapAllA=901555

Table 11.1 Charge variables

Variable Purpose

time Determines the length of each time interval (how long each unit lasts). The value

is entered in seconds and hundredths or thousandths of a second (the maximum

value accepted is 655.35 seconds, 65.535 if thousandths are entered). If time is

set to zero or not present no charges are generated. External charge informa-

tion is passed through if received.

start Sets the initial unit level. Enter a value between 0 and 127 whole units. If you

want to use a flat rate, set the desired number of units here and set the wait to

255 to turn off the time interval.

wait Determines the delay after which charge generation begins. Once this time has

elapsed, charge impulses are sent at the interval determined by time. Enter a

value between 0 and 254 seconds. 255 deactivates the charge pulse. In this

case, the time variable is ignored.

11 Feature packages

Page 203CELLX 16.2

External charges can be added to the generated charges by adding 128 to the start value.

(The value range for the initial unit level is still set from 0 to 127). The maximum supported

number of units per connection is 32767 units.

Additional adjustments may be made to allow for the implementation of new charge models.

When charge information is sent as Currency hervorheben, values can be expressed in

thousandths for greater precision in charge calculation.

For the internal Layer 3 protocols, charges can be specified to the third decimal place

(thousandth) using the /Value option (Example: /Value:1.056). In this manner, charges

can be generated for units of currency requiring accuracy to the third decimal place or

for fractions such as tenths of a cent. This allows for greater flexibility in the

transmission of charges to terminal devices. In order to make use of this option,

connected devices must support “AOC-D Currency”. In the current version, this option

is only available for the DSS1 protocol.

A multiplication factor can be specified for received or generated charges.

During the charge generation process, each charge unit is multiplied by a preset factor.

This factor appears in the mapping entry after the time and start/wait variables

(MapAllsrc=dst time start/wait*factor).

Each unit, for example, can be converted to 12 cents. The following example illustrates

the use of this feature:

In the following example, all received charge units are multiplied by 12 and passed on. If AOC-

Currency is set on the internal port, each unit appears as 12 cents.

The multiplication factor is also used to implement two new charge models:

If the factor value exceeds 128, this indicates the use of an initial toll-free phase

followed by retroactive charge generation.

If the multiplication factor is set to 255, a “minute price” is used in place of the time

variable.

These charge models are explained under Retroactive charge generation after initial toll-free

period.

11.3.4 Generating charges with the

To generate charges for the attached PBX, add the charge variables described in Table 11.1

to the MapAll commands according to the requirements of the corporate network environ-

ment.

In the following mapping example, time=1.65, start=131, wait=0. Three initial tariff units

(131-128) are transmitted upon connection and a new unit is generated every 1.65 seconds

and transmitted the next full second. Charges received from the public network for the con-

nection to the corporate network dial-in node are added and transmitted (because 128 has

been added to the start variable’s value).

Example 11.17 Charging pulse example

...

MapAll1=91 1 128/255*12

...

Example 11.18 Generating charges with the 1

...

MapAll0172=9123450172 1.65 131/0

...

11 Feature packages

Page 204CELLX 16.2

Upon connection establishment, 3 initial tariff units (131-128) are transmitted. Then a 10-sec-

ond delay (wait=10) elapses before charge impulses are generated according to the time vari-

able (a new unit is generated every 1.65 seconds and transmitted the next full second).

Charges received from the public network for the connection to the corporate network dial-

in node are added and transmitted (because 128 has been added to the start variable’s value).

New charge models can be implemented by taking advantage of the multiplication factor in

conjunction with the time and start/wait variables.

Retroactive charge generation after initial toll-free period

The charge generation process has been expanded to allow for the implementation of this

new charge model. In this scenario, an initial period is free of charge, but after that charges

are calculated for the entire call. For example: the first minute is free, but as soon as the sec-

ond minute begins, charges are incurred for the first minute as well.

The multiplication factor is set to a base value of 128. If the value exceeds this base, the re-

maining value represents the number of units charged with each time interval. The following

configuration generates one unit (129-128) per minute (time=60 seconds) retroactively after

the first minute (wait=60 sec.).

Price per minute

A price per minute charge model can be implemented as of version 5.01 in one of two ways:

The attached PBX supports Advice of Charges as Currency

If not, the PBX can be configured to assign one thousandth (¹⁄1000) of a currency unit

(€0.001 or ¹⁄10 of a cent) to each charge unit.

This model does not always guarantee whole second accuracy (depending on the rates), but

it is significantly more precise than the standard charge generation method.

Example 11.19 Generating charges with the 2

...

MapAll0172=9123450172 1.65 131/10

...

Example 11.20 Retroactive charge generation after initial toll-free period

...

MapAll030=901019030 60 0/60*129

...

If thousandths are defined, a maximum value of 65.535 is possible. If tenths are defined, a

maximum value of 6553.5 is possible. Sind diese Zahlen im englischen Format, also 65 euros

und 53 und ein halb cents bzw. 6553 euros und 50 cents?

11 Feature packages

Page 205CELLX 16.2

If the attached PBX supports Advice of Charges as Currency, include the following line in the

’s pabx.cfg.

If the PBX does not support this AOC model, but allows for the assignment of one thousandth

(¹⁄1000) of a currency unit (€0.001 or ¹⁄10 of a cent) for each charge unit, the above entry

need not be included. The configuration entries must make use of the multiplication factor

for a single unit as shown below.

If the minute price does not allow generated charges to “fit” evenly into a second (such as

20 cents per minute or 0.33 cents per second), the system can be configured to generate 10

“points” every 3 seconds (€0.01 or 1 cent).

The “points” method allows for a more precise calculation of smaller intervals.

The price per minute can also be specified in each routing entry by setting the multiplication

factor to 255, to signalize to the system that a minute price is being used instead of the in-

terval usually specified with the time variable. The attached PBX must support Advice of

Charges as Currency, and the appropriate settings must be made in the ’s pabx.cfg as de-

scribed under Price per minute.

The examples below show sample entries with rates of 18 and 9 cents per minute.

Example 11.21 Price per minute 1

...

Controller01=10 NTS2M DSS1 CRC4 UNIT:€ VALUE:0.001

...

Example 11.22 Price per minute 2

...

MapAll902=90103002 1.00 0/0*4 ; each second costs €0.004 (€0.24 / minute)

MapAll909=90108809 1.00 0/0*5 ; each second costs €0.005 (€0.30 / minute)

...

Example 11.23 Price per minute 3

...

MapAll902=90101302 3.00 0/0*10 ; 3 seconds cost €0.01 (€0.20 / minute)

MapAll909=90105009 2.00 0/0*3 ; 2 seconds cost €0.003 (€0.09 / minute)

...

Example 11.24 Price per minute 4

...

MapAll902=90101302 0.18 0/0*255 ; €0.18 / minute

MapAll909=90105009 0.09 0/0*255 ; €0.09 / minute

...

11 Feature packages

Page 206CELLX 16.2

If greater precision is desired (¹⁄1000 of a currency unit – $0.001 or ¹⁄10 of a cent), use settings

such as the following.

11.4 Online traffic monitor

The Online Traffic Monitor allows you to collect and monitor statistics and call detail records

(CDRs). The following functions are possible with this feature package:

ASR calculation

Generation of CDRs

Generation of online CDRs using e-mail

11.4.1 Generating and retrieving CDRs

With the Log and failedlog commands, you save CDRs and unconnected calls in the .

For these parameters (Log and failedlog), a folder and file name must always be specified

after the equal sign. The function is not active (no data is recorded) until a file name is spec-

ified.

Example 11.25 Price per minute 5

...

Controller01=10 NTS2M DSS1 CRC4 UNIT:€ VALUE:0.010

...

Example 11.26 Price per minute 6

...

MapAll902=90101302 1.80 0/0*255 ; €0.18 / minute

MapAll909=90105009 0.90 0/0*255 ; €0.09 / minute

...

Example 11.27 Price per minute 7

...

Controller01=10 NTS2M DSS1 CRC4 UNIT:€ VALUE:0.001

...

Do not configure both StatisticTimeReset and StatisticTime or StatisticTimeReset and Statis-

ticCounter together.

Example 11.28

Log=/data/cdr.log

failedlog=/data/failed.log

11 Feature packages

Page 207CELLX 16.2

The service indicator listed in the call log and missed calls list describes the type of connection

as a four digit hexadecimal number. The coding is conducted according to the 1TR6 standard.

A few frequently used values are listed below:

For detailed information on how to automatically divide the files (e.g. on a daily basis), please

refer to the Chapter 5.2.1.2.

11.4.1.1 Call log

The following entry in the pabx.cfg configuration file activates the capability to generate

CDRs in the :

Log=/boot/cdr.log

The cdr.log file is stored in the data directory. New entries are always added to the end of the

file. The file is open only during editing.

With recording of files, system maintenance increases. You have to be sure to download or

delete files and ensure that there is enough disk space left on the hard drive.

Table 11.2 1TR6 service indicators

Service Indicator Definition

0101 ISDN-telephony 3.1 kHz

0102 analog telephony

0103 ISDN-telephony 7 kHz

0200 Fax group 2

0202 Fax group 3

0203 Data via modem

0400 Telefax group 4

0500 SMS or BTX (64 kbps)

0700 Data transfer 64 kbps

07… Bit rate adaptation

1001 Video telephone – audio 3.1 kHz

1002 Video telephone – audio 7 kHz

1003 Video telephone – video

11 Feature packages

Page 208CELLX 16.2

Each line represents an outgoing call with the following information separated by commas:

Sample log file

The example below shows a sample log file.

Differentiating between ports in the same trunk group

To differentiate between ports with the same number in the CDRs, a specific node number

must be defined. You can expand the subscriber configuration line with the keyword

NODE[<no.>] for this purpose. <no.> can be a string of between 1 and 15 characters:

Subscriber<xx>=... NODE[<num>]

Table 11.3 Call Log Entries

Column Description

0Version

1Start time (format DD.MM.YY-hh.mm.ss)

2End time (format DD.MM.YY-hh.mm.ss)

3Source. The following format applies: [node

number:automatically set internal channel num-

ber]

4Destination. The following format applies: [node

number:automatically set internal channel num-

ber]

5IMSI (optional)

6IP logging signaling: RTP (optional)

7Audio codec used (optional)

8Frame size (optional)

9Service indicator (cf. Chapter 11.4.1 on

page 206)

10 Call duration

11 Cause values

12 Charge from the public line (in units)

13 Charge generated from the system (in units) (if

configured)

14 Cell ID (if mobile call)

15 RSSI (if mobile call)

Example 11.29 Sample log file

C1,25.11.09-10:16:20,25.11.09-10:16:27,9,111,,,,,0102,7,1f,0,,3663,10,,,

C1,25.11.09-10:35:16,25.11.09-10:35:26,9,111,,,,,0102,10,1f,0,3,38922,14,,,

C1,25.11.09-10:38:30,25.11.09-10:38:41,9,111,,,,,0102,11,90,0,3,38922,14,,,

11 Feature packages

Page 209CELLX 16.2

In the below formula, <num> consists of a four-digit number that is included in the CDR.

The following example shows the pabx.cfg configuration file changed according to the for-

mula.

Differentiating between SIM cards

The CDR can contain the IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity), which identifies each

SIM card used.

Example 11.30 Differentiating between ports in the same trunk group 1

C1,25.11.09-10:16:20,25.11.09-

10:16:27,[0000:01]9,[0006:01]111,,,,,0102,7,1f,0,,3663,10,,,

Example 11.31 Differentiating between ports in the same trunk group 2

...

Subscriber00=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0001]

Subscriber01=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0002]

Subscriber02=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0003]

Subscriber03=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0004]

Subscriber04=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0005]

Subscriber05=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0006]

Subscriber06=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0007]

Subscriber07=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0008]

Subscriber08=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0009]

Subscriber09=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0010]

Subscriber10=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0011]

Subscriber11=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0012]

Subscriber12=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0013]

Subscriber13=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0014]

Subscriber14=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0015]

Subscriber15=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM24] CHADDR ALARM

NEXT NODE[0016]

...

Example 11.32 Differentiating between SIM cards 1

C1,25.11.09-10:35:16,25.11.09-

10:35:26,9,111,123456789123451,,,,0102,10,1f,0,3,38922,14

11 Feature packages

Page 210CELLX 16.2

The following example shows the pabx.cfg configuration file changed according to the for-

mula.

Activating peer data for VoIP calls

To generate a VoIP-call CDR entry that includes IP addresses for the remote device’s signaling

and voice data, audio codec and frame size, the entry VoipIpLogging=Yes must be included

in the VoIP profile.

The following entry shows the route.cfg configuration file changed according to the for-

mula.

The following CDR entry includes IP addresses for signaling and voice data, audio codec and

frame size.

Example 11.33 Differentiating between SIM cards 2

...

Subscriber04=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM4,IMSI] CHADDR

ALARM NEXT

Subscriber05=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM4,IMSI] CHADDR

ALARM NEXT

Subscriber06=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM4,IMSI] CHADDR

ALARM NEXT

Subscriber07=TRANSPARENT ROUTER GSM[0000,00000,<SMSC>,1,1,1,SIM4,IMSI] CHADDR

ALARM NEXT

...

Example 11.34 Activating peer data for VoIP calls 1

[Voip:DF]

VoipDirection=IO

VoipPeerAddress=192.168.0.2

VoipIpMask=0xffffffff

VoipCompression=g729 g711a t38

VoipMaxChan=30

VoipSilenceSuppression=Yes

VoipSignalling=0

VoipTxM=4

VoipIPLogging=Yes

Example 11.35 Activating peer data for VoIP calls 2

C1,24.11.09-16:52:20,24.11.09-

16:52:22,401419,9777,,172.20.25.103:172.20.25.103,G711a,20,0101,2,10,0,,,11

11 Feature packages

Page 211CELLX 16.2

CDRs for callback and two stage calls

In the case of CDR entries for Two stage dialing/Callback calls, the beginning and ending

times for the first call leg is always used as the call time. The call time in seconds appears first

for the first leg, followed by a slash and the connection time for the second leg.

11.4.1.2 Missed calls list

All incoming calls that are not connected can be recorded in a list to facilitate return calls.

Recording is activated using the failedlog=<name> entry in the pabx.cfg. Specify a file

name, e.g. failedlog=failed.log. Once this setting is made, recording begins at once.

Each line represents an unaccepted incoming call with the following information separated

by commas:

Example 11.36 CDRs for callback and two stage calls

C1,24.11.09-17:15:29,24.11.09-

17:15:57,[0002:01]CB,[0008:01]DLA,,172.20.25.103:172.20.25.103,G711a,20,0102,28/

3,90,0,,,

To avoid sending these values as the reason for call teardown, translate the cause values to

standard values Chapter 8.14

Table 11.4 Failed log entries

Column Description

0Version

1Start time (format DD.MM.YY-hh.mm.ss)

2 Source. The following format applies: [node

number:automatically set internal channel num-

ber]

3Destination. The following format applies: [node

number:automatically set internal channel num-

ber]

4IMSI

5IP logging signaling: RTP

6 Audio codec used

7Frame size

8 Service indicator (cf. Chapter 11.4.1 on

page 206)

9Cause values

10 Call duration (if the call does not result in an

Alerting, the entry will be -1)

11 Number of call attempts

11 Feature packages

Page 212CELLX 16.2

The example below shows a sample failed log file.

The reason the connection could not be established is specified using DSS1 codes:

91 – (user busy)

ff – call not answered (disconnected by calling party)

When callback with DTMF is configured and no connection is established to the B subscriber,

an entry recording the A subscriber’s connection time is generated in the failed.log file.

The CDR contains the IP addresses for signaling and voice data. The first IP address is the sig-

naling address and the second one is the RTP address.The IMSI is written behind the IP ad-

dresses.

12 Cell ID

13 RSSI

Table 11.4 Failed log entries (continued)

Column Description

Example 11.37 Sample failed log 1

V1,24.11.09-16:13:08,[0006:01]IN,[0008:01]GSM,123456789123456,,,,0101,92,-

1,1,34193,9

V1,24.11.09-16:33:34,[0006:01]IN,[0008:01]GSM,123456789123456,,,,0101,92,-

1,1,34193,12

V1,24.11.09-16:35:19,[0006:01]IN,[0008:01]GSM,123456789123456,,,,0101,92,-

1,1,34193,11

V1,24.11.09-16:35:59,[0006:01]IN,[0008:01]GSM,123456789123456,,,,0101,92,-

1,1,34193,11

V1,24.11.09-16:37:29,[0006:01]IN,[0008:01]GSM,123456789123456,,,,0101,92,-

1,1,34193,11

V1,24.11.09-

16:39:17,[0006:01]IN,[0008:01]GSM,123456789123456,,,,0101,ff,7,1,34193,11

Example 11.38 Sample failed log 2

V1,24.11.09-

16:39:17,[0006:01]IN,[0008:01]GSM,123456789123456,,,,0101,ff,7,1,34193,11

Example 11.39 Sample failed log 3

V1,24.11.09-16:52:20,24.11.09-

16:52:22,[0008:01]401419,[0006:01]IN777,262032441017556,172.20.25.103:172.20.25.

103,G711a,20,0101,2,10,0,,34193,11

11 Feature packages

Page 213CELLX 16.2

In the case of missed-call entries for Two stage dialing/Callback calls, dur is the connection

time for the first leg.

11.4.1.3 Sending CDRs via e-mail

With an appropriate configuration, you can send corresponding CDRs of outgoing and in-

coming calls as e-mail. Bear in mind that the mail server must be configured in the [Mail] sec-

tion of the pabx.cfg, as described in Chapter 5.2.2. The sender is given as cdr and the

system’s name appears in the subject box. The text box contains the CDR information accord-

ing to the format for the entry in Log=/data/cdr.log @<account> @<domain>. A space must

appear between cdr.log and @<account>; @<domain> is optional. You can also send CDR

entries via e-mail to an e-mail recipient.

Enter an @ sign to send each CDR entry as e-mail.

If you replace the first @ sign with an !, the present cdr.log will be sent whenecver a new one

is generated.

11.5 Ported number screening

Ported number screening is a very useful functionality to avoid high routing costs for numbers

that have been ported to another network operator.

Number portabilty refers to the ability to transfer either an existing landline or mobile tele-